HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 4399 - Contract - Pharr & Company - KN Clapp & Rodgers Pool Renovations - 02_24_1994Resolution No. 4399
February 24, 1994
Item #27
RESOLUTION
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to
execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock a Contract and all related documents by and
between the City of Lubbock and Pharr and Company of Lubbock, Texas, to furnish and install all
materials as bid for the K.N. Clapp and Rodgers Pool Renovations for the City of Lubbock, which
contract is attached hereto, which shall be spread upon the minutes of the Council and as spread
upon the minutes of this Council shall constitute and be a part of this Resolution as if fully copied
herein in detail.
Passed by the City Council this 24th day of February 1994.
ATTEST:
Betty NO Jdhfis6h, Pty Secretary
APPROVED AS TO CONTENT:
111-14t�f'
VlctoJr, rc 'Im , P rchasing Manager
AS TO
Assistant City Attorney
DG V:dp\GAccdocs\PharftRes
February 15, 1994
Res 43�i
CITY OF LUBBOCK
SPECIFICATIONS FOR
K. N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS
BID #12843
1.
CITY of LUBBOCK
Lubbock, Texas
City of Lubbock
P.O. Box 2000
Lubbock, Texas 79457
606-767-21 E7
�MAILED TO VENDOR:
CLOSE DATE:
r%
Office of
Purchasing
February 11,1994
February 14,1994 at 1 P.M.
BID #12843 - K.N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATION
ADDENDUM # 1
Please modify or amend Contract Documents as follows:
1. Please find attached items of clarification under cover of addendum 41.
All requests for additional information or classification concerning this bid should be submitted in writing
and directed to Laura. Ritchie, Buyer.
PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY WITH YOUR BID
THANK YOU,
f-)a� ��Lcnr
Laura Ritchie
Buyer
i
r,
RENOVAnON OF K.N. CLAPP SWI DAING POOL
RMOVATE OF RODOR1tS SWIMYvMG POOL
FOR THE CITY OF LUBBOCK
RID NO. 12843
The following shalt be incorporated and become a part of the original drawings and
specifications of the above identified projects. Please acknowledge the receipt of this Addendum
by noting it in your proposal.
1. On the Drawings, Sheet A2, 14 Typical Section Thru Existing Glazed Tile plumbing
Chase at Women's And Men's Dressing Room: Change new 1" thick removable cover
panels to porcelain finished veneer panels. Panels shall be porcelain on 28 gauge steal
applied to 1/4" thick water-resistant hardboard, equal to, Mapes Industries, Inc. Veneer
Panels. All panels shall be applied over 3/4" thick marine plywood. Color shall be as
selected by Architect from standard colors.
1. On the Drawings, Sheet P1, Plumbing Plan - Demolition, Note No. 2: For clar1fl atlon,
the removal of existing piping located on the floor of the swimming pool shall include the
complete removal of the existing concrete encasement (8" high x 12")wide approximate
dw). fisting pool walls and floor shall be left smooth and clan without rough spots or
sharp projections. Any and all holes and voids shall be grouted, flush with adjacent
surfaces.
2. On the Drawings, Sheet A30 01 Cross Section Tbru Existing Concrete Swimming I;ool:
Change Scale to read 3/16" = 11-00.
Addendum No. 1 - 1
AdECUAWCAT_. r_rx�,r„ 3.
1. In the Specifications, 15200-4, Waste Pump and Motor, them shall be furnished and
installed as shown on the plans a Weinman 432M single submersible centrifugal sewage
ejector or equal. The sewage ejector shall be 4 inch heavy duty (screenless) sewage
pumps fitted with non -clogging type impellers. The pump sha11 have a opacity of 500
GPM against a heed of 40 feet. 7be motor shall be 200 volts;, 3 phase, 60 cycle, 1750
rpm with dual mechanical seals. Provide 2 submersible type float switch connected thru
starter to operate pump.
7 2. On the Drawings, Sheet P4 of 4, pump Schedule:
w
P1 example should read Weinman 4L2 W 5L2
P2 example should read Weinman 432M nZ 432-VS
r
E END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1
I
6
�e
t
1.
9 I
9
£0'd ObftT b6/01/L0
Addendum No. 1 - 2
6UXUUej
CITY OF LUBBOCK
REQUEST FOR BIDS
FOR
TITLE: K. N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS
ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS
BID NUMBER: 12843
PROJECT NUMBER: 1421-553107-9918
CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT
F
i
rr
y. .
•D
p�p
t
1.
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
2.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
GENERAL
�-
3.
BID PROPOSAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS
4.
PAYMENT BOND
5.
PERFORMANCE BOND
6.
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
r..
7.
CONTRACT
8.
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
9.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
ti
10.
SPECIFICATIONS
x.
11.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
p
12.
NOTICE OF ACCEPTANCE
ro
G
t
p
f"'e•
r
a
w
A
O
E�
W
U
O
z
r
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
BID 012843
Sealed bids addressed to Laura Ritchie, Buyer, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received at the office of the
Purchasing Manager, Municipal Bldg., 1625 13th St., Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 1:00 o'clock a.m.
on the 14tb day of February.1994, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to fiurnish
all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project:
K. N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened by the Buyer
at his office and publicly read aloud.
It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of Purchasing
Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written.
The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 24th day of February, 1994, at the Municipal
Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the
right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a
performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., in the amount of
100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000.00. Said statutory bonds
should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior, as the rating of the bond company
is a factor that will be considered in determination of the lowest responsible bidder. If the contract price does not
exceed $25,000.00 the said statutory bonds will not be required.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or
certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety
company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total
amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if
required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him.
` It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding
all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have
been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted.
The plans, specifications, proposal forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the
r-Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing, rate of per diem wages
included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which
document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision
of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale
and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage
scale.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this
advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in
response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or
national origin in consideration for an award.
There will be a pre -bid conference on 7th day of February. 1994, at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Personnel
Conference Room 108, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid
meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information
made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the Purchasing Department
at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5.00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street Room L-04 at least 48 hours in advance
of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
buu-A�c l��
Laura Ritchie
BUYER
F
F
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
BID # 12843
Sealed bids addressed to Laura Ritchie, Buyer, Purchasing Department, City of Lubbock, Texas,
will be received at the Purchasing Office, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock,
Texas, 79401 until 1:00 o'clock p.m. on the 14th day of Fcbruary,1994, or as changed by the issuance
of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the
construction of the following described project:
K N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS
After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the
office of the Buyer and publicly read aloud.
The plans, specifications, bid forms and contract documents may be examined at the office of the
Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, Texas.
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the Schedule of General Prevailing Rate of Per
Diem Wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the
City of Lubbock, Texas. Each bidder's attention is further directed to the provisions of Article 5159a,
Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning such wage scales and
�• payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by the City of
Lubbock.
The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into
pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal
opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the
grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award.
f There will be a prebid conference on the 7th day of February, 1994, at 10:00 a.m., in the
Personnel Conference Room 108, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas.
r-
The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock
pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like
bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the
Purchasing Department at (806) 767-2167 (Monday -Friday, 8:00 - 5:00 p.m.) or 1625 13th Street, Room
L-04 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting.
CITY OF LUBBOCK
��rCkal
Laura Ritchie
BUYER
r
I
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
PW
F
d GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this
project in accordance with contract documents for the K. N. CLAPP AND RODGERS FOOL RENOVATIONS.
2. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions.
1, All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on he contract documents for the construction
of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents.
3. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS
It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the
contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of
forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders.
4. TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION
The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 90 (ninety) consecutive calendar days
*^ from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder.
The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City
reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract
documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the
progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take
such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified.
S. PAYMENT
All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract
documents.
6. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID
The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an
affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by
the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been
notified.
7. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSFU
The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be
furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor
of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the
E project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full
responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract
r.. documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project.
8. GUARANTEES
All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials
and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which
shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature
whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work
as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock).
9. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR
The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during
construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for
proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor.
10. PROTECTION OF THE WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies,
machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the
work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its
certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract
has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information:
(a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the proposed
contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed.
(b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder.
(c) Equipment schedule.
11. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX
This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04
of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act.
The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be
incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase.
12. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES
It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to
exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground
structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these
contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines
and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work
contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas,
at Contractor's expense.
13. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES
The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take
such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The
Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and
when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost
and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date
of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project.
14. EXPLOSIVES
The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City.
In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are
authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall
further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of
construction activity.
Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor.
In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be
the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the
site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable
the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however,
shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations.
15. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE
The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in
progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number
where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress.
16. INSURANCE
The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General
Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory
to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or arty material change will
be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the
insurer waiving the right to subrogation.
The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured and shall further state that all
` subcontractors are named as additional insureds, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the
.. Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted.
p 17. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS
Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these
contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of
general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the
requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above
mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem
wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be
applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays
unless the following conditions exist:
(1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its
citizens.
(2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the
penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract
within the allotted time.
Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the
Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and
obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow ''-
construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative.
In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract
which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day
of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerovs to property or life -
is. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS
The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this
contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than
once each week.. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the
seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible
copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each
day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates
or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The
Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate
of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents.
The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each
laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is
paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per
diem wages included in these contract documents.
19. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATOR CLAUSES
Proposals submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or
decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder
without being considered.
20. PREPARATION FOR PROPOSAL
The bidder shall submit his proposal on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in
and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he proposes to do the work contemplated or
furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of
discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If
the proposal is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a proposal is
submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the proposal
signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the proposal is submitted by a
company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the proposal signed by an
official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign proposals must be properly
certified and must be in writing and submitted with the proposal. The proposal shall be executed in ink.
Each proposal shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the
outside of the envelope in the following manner:
(a) Bidder's name
(b) Proposal for (description of the project).
L
r�
a
F 21
Bid proposals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no proposal
may be withdrawn or altered thereafter.
BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following:
(a) Notice to Bidders.
(b) General Instructions to Bidders.
(c) Bidder's Proposal.
(d) Statutory Bond (if required).
(e) Contract Agreement.
(f) General Conditions.
(g) Special Conditions (if any).
(h) Specifications.
(i) Insurance Certificates.
6) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by
reference into the aforementioned contract documents.
r
t
L-- L-_: E -- L� L® L- E-- L-_ L-- t L
i
�r
-r- BID PROPOSAL
LUMP SUM PROPOSAL CONTRACT
PLACE: Lubbock, Texas
_r- DATE: February 14, 1994
PROJECT NUMBER: 12843 - K N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS
�s
Proposal of Pharr Constriction Co., Inc. d/b/a Pharr & Company (hereinafter called Bidder)
To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner)
Gentlemen:
The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a K.N. Clapp and Rodgers
Pool Renovations Bid 112843 Project #1421-553107-9918
havingcareful( examined the plans,
y p ,specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract
documents and the site of the proposed work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the
proposed project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to
construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the
price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents.
..�
..,
ow
r.
r.
10"
BASE BID ITEM 1:KN.CLySix 6rAPP POOL }� /%
MATERIALS40" Aru-4, y,�l X-ec�St nel Ally
DDQ,yc
SERVICES: `P.I `t F
t�c�5cr nq sir 1
r�C�t•C!% �rle/il
Ll��'✓i$
TOTAL BASE BID (ITEM 1):
rgAri f7`;
lf1*xe7kySc4<
BASE BID ITEM 2: RODGERS POOL
"-X , C!9Il
£o*¢1i t V l
SERVICES: Ow *1 4eyl / `o"I'aax L/O!/i�Ll� ($ OIL
macd 0 O, rep )
TOTAL BASE BID (ITEM 2): %vo A.1av�p///7�'
TOTAL BID (ITEMS 1 & 2):
5
(Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.)
Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice 1
Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (Ninety) consecutive calendar days thereafter as stipulated in tl
specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of
$500.00 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for
completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents.
Bidder understands and agrees that this bid proposal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction
number 20 of the General Instructions to Bidders.
Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding.
The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the
scheduled closing time for receiving bids.
The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans,
specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or
before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided
the contract documents.
Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified
check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a proposal bond from a reliable surety company, payable without
recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5% ) of the total amount of the bid submittec
a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award
the contract to him.
Enclosed with this proposal is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for N/A
Dollars ($ ) or a Proposal Bond in the sum of 5% of total amount bid Dollars ($ 5% ),
which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the proposal is accepted by the
Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents and the required bond (if any) with the Owner with
ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said proposal; otherwise, said check or bond shall be
returned to the undersigned upon demand.
Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract docume
made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
Pharr Construction Co., Inc.
d/b/a Pharr b Company
Contract
BY:
ohn B. Pharr,
Vice —President
(Seal if Bidder is a Corporation)
AT�ST:
,/ 1
F— Secre Jackie. 1 ller
722933 `
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY .
NO. 108092
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing
under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland does hereby constitute and appoint
-1 Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza, Ruth Anderson, Amy'R. Brrwm, Ginger Delzell
and Staci Gross
of the City of Wichita Falls 1 s , State of Texas its true and lawful Attomey(s}in-Fact, each in their separate
capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its name as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other
written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guaranteeing the performance of contracts;
a and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
In Witness Whereof the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal,
duty attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, this loth day of Dix , A.D. 19 93 .
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
A ION
tt196a r (Signed) By........... .......
� s
Senior Vice President.
i� (Signed) By........ .........................._.................
Assistant Secretary
STATE OF MARYL AND)
SS:
w BALTIMORE CITY
On this loth day of -_ , A.D. 19 93 , before me personalty came Robert J . Lamendola
Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D.-Sims , Assistant
1 Secretary of said Company, with both of whom i am personally acquainted, who being by me severally duly swom said that they, the said Robert J .
Lamendola and Paul U. Sims were respectively the Senior Vice President sad the Assistant Secretary of
the said UNITED STATES FIDELi'iY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they
each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to aid Power of Attorney was such corporate seal, that it was so. affixed by order of the Board of Directors
of said corporation, and that they signed their Dames thereto by like order as Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company.
My Commission expires the llth day in , March A.D.
A.D. 19 95 .
C4
(Signed) ^ t !' f!�r s.... !.. t ......
f
NOTARY PUBLIC
t 4Aa „ A—
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNITED STATES
FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24, 1992:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts sad other instruments
( relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorneys) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Power(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company,
either by the Chairman or the President. or an Executive Via President, or a Senior Vice President, or a.Viee President or am, Assistant Vice President, jointly with the
Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each
of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing
Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and, unless subsequently
revoked and subject to any [imitations act forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and
binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shal I be valid and binding upon the Company
with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached.
RESOLVED. that Attomey(s)-in-fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in &Mr case, subject to the terms and limitations
of the Power of Attorney issued to them, to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and aU bonds and undertakings,
and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof and any such instrument executed by such Attorneys}in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by
a an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
L Paul D . Sims , an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY,
do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Dimaors on September 24, 1992 and that this
Resolution is in full force and effect
I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
Attorney is in full force and efI'ea and has not been revolted. 14 t:b
to Testimony Whereof. I have lreunto set MY hand and the seal of a STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this "Illy
of February .I9 94
OMAN........................!./. .✓............ .
f 111196 Assistant Secretary
FS 3 (10-92) ,��
0
w
a
74
v
UNITED STATES F1DEL I UAkANTY COMPANY
(A St k o IJ any)
TEXAS STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND
(Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount)
STATE OF TEXAS
*4
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK BOND NUMBER.. 012011901935
........... .......
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That ..... RW:K.qqnr?4p(;tio Qpm n
...'R pa.y...Inc. dba Pharr & Comp
.......................... ........................
.. y
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY,
a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety authorized and admitted
to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter
ke-
called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ....................................................
................... Lubbock ............................................................................................
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of ... F9UT.YTPRED.NINETY FOUR THOUSAND
.......................................
................ SEVEN. HUNDRED. FORTY. AND..NO/10.0--= .......... .................................. Dollars
.............. ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves,
our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the. 24:tb
day of ... FPbruaTX ......... . 104. a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof, for
Bid #12843—K.N. Clapp and Rodgers Pool Renovations
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall
pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided
for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160, Revised
Civil Statutes of Texas and all liabilities on this bond to all such claimants shall be determined in accordance
with the provisions thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
Js
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
......... M,4 ......... day of . 904VAVY ............ . 19Co
Pharr Construction Company, Inc.
wl
.................. .............. .. ............. (Seal)
"P ;�;4a!K h�r,Vice—Presidentr .....
. . .. . . ..............
.. . ... 7 er. (Seal)
BOND CHECK ED STATE DEU:TYAND GUARANTY COMPANY
BEST RATING
B ..................... (Seal)
LICENSED IN TEXA Staci Gross Attorney -in -fact
DATE-Z--'Z=14(— BY
Contract 214 (Texas) (10-89)
722940
UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
POWER OF ATTORNEY
NO. 108092 ... +� .
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing
under the laws of the State of Maryland and having its principal office at the City of Baltimore, in the State of Maryland, does hereby constitute and appoint
Donal Boley, Steve Deal, Laura Espinoza, Ruth Anderson, Amy R. Brown, Ginger Delzell
and Staci Gross
of the City of Wichita Fa11 S State of Texas its true and lawful Attorneys}in-Faa, each in their separate
capacity if more than one is named above, to sign its acme as surety to, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, uodertalongs, contracts and other
written instruments in the nature thereof on behalf of the Company in its business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons; guaranteeing the performance of contracts;
aad executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by lave.
In Witness Whereof, the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY has caused this instrument to be sealed with its corporate seal,
duly attested by the signatures of its Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, thisl0th day of December A.D. 1993 .
I GAY UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
smror<o (Signed) By. ..�.
f Senior Vice Prcsidcat
(Signed) By ........ ..............: ............. .................
Assistant Secretary
STATE OF MARYLAND)
SS:
BALTIMORE CITY ) -
r" On this loth day of December , A.D. 19 93 , before me personally came Robert J . Lamendola
Senior Vice President of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY and Paul D. Sims , Assistant
Secretary of said Company, with both of whom I am personally acquainted, who being by me severally duly sworn. said that they, the said Robert J .
Lamendola and Paul D. Sims were respectively the Senior. Vice President and the Assistant Secretary of
the said UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY, the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney; that they
each knew the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said Power of Attorney was such corporate seal, that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors
of said corporation, and that they signed their names thereto by like order as Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of the Company.
rMy Commission expires the llth dayie March) A.D.19 9S
wrur. (Signed)rc.1'�:'4.
4p NOTARY PUBLIC
This Power of Attorney is granted under and by authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of the UNITED STATES
FIDEL17Y AND GUARANTY COMPANY on September 24, 1992:
RESOLVED, that in connection with the fidelity and surety insurance business of the Company, all bonds, undertakings, contracts and other instruments
relating to said business may be signed, executed, and acknowledged by persons or entities appointed as Attorneys) -in -Fact pursuant to a Power of Attorney issued in
accordance with these resolutions. Said Powcr(s) of Attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed in the name and on behalf of the Company,
f either by the Chairman, or the President, or an Executive Vice President, or a Senior Vice President, or a Vice President or an Assistant Vice President, jointly with the
Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lithographed. The signature of each
of the foregoing officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing
Attomey(s)-in-Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and, unless subsequently
rooked and subject to any limitations set forth therein, any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and
binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall he valid and binding upon the Company
with respect to any bond or undertaking to which it is validly attached.
r RESOLVED, that Attomey(s)-in-Fact shall have the power and authority, unless subsequently revoked and, in any case, subject to the terms and limitations
of the Power of Attorney issued to them,. to execute and deliver on behalf of the Company and to attach the seal of the Company to any and all bonds and undertakings,
and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such instrument executed by such Attorneys) -in -Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as if signed by
an Executive Officer and sealed and attested to by the Secretary of the Company.
I, Paul D. Sims . an Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY,
do hereby certify that the foregoing is a true excerpt from the Resolution of the said Company as adopted by its Board of Directors on September 24, 1992 and that this
- Resolution is in M force and effect
I, the undersigned Assistant Secretary of the UNITED STATES FIDE11W AND GUARANTY COMPANY do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of
r. Attorney is in full force and effect and has not been revoked.
In Testimony Whereof, I have hereunto set my band and the seal of a 1 I E STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY on this 2 Lth day
of February .19 94.
r' iimroarts...........�..............................
iti9t3 Assistant Secretary
r" FS 3 (10-92)
PERFORMANCE BOND
r
EtpEUrv,y
O
`F UNITED STATES FIDEL o . AIZANTY COMPANY
' Bess
,,. .. (A St k o Oany)
TEXAS STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND
(Penalty of this bond must be 100% of Contract amount)
STATE OF TEXAS
L
:•I
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK BOND NUMBER.. =0119.01 M..... .
r
P KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That ....PSI XJ;Q0A=Q iQy). CQMP4Ayr...IRrw P. dba . Pb"K . A. COI[P�E-itur..........................
........................................................................................................................
(hereinafter called the Principal), as Principal, and UNITED STATES FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY,
a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Maryland, a Corporate Surety, authorized and admitted
to do business in the State of Texas and licensed by the State of Texas to execute bonds as Surety, (hereinafter
called the Surety), as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto ....................................................
City.. of„Lubbocic.................................................................................
(hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of . , .FOUR HUNDRED NINETY FOUR THOUSAND
.............. SEVEN..HWDRED . FORTY. AND. N01 ID ---------- .................................... Dollars
(s..494,E74Q:QQ.................. ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, bind ourselves,
our heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the
.... 2.4ti?....... day of.. FI??n?ar`Y.........19 ...94... , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part
hereof, for
Bid #12843—K.N. Clapp and Rodgers Pool Renovations
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall
faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this
ra obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Article 5160, Revised
Civil Statutes of Texas and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions
thereof to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
r94-
........ 24th ......... day of . February .......... ha9. P nstruction Company, Inc..
:. .............. . .. �.. dba .Pharr.. s, .Co .... (Seal)
. ..... ... .. ..
.............. ... SP o ' K. Iia'rr', ce=ire dent `
. (Seal)
BOND CH D 5TA S FIDELITY AND GUARANTY COMPANY
BEST RATING B9ta; .................. .. (Seal)
LICENSED IN TEXAS r s Attomsy-in-fact
�,►a DATEa S4/ 1 BY
�, .:£�"'fi 7" :?} t, "f �.1" //I`L•''si' ',`Ilia � !f4?'.1"� J ii4;,. „J ffi? i\ / l},�,� ++ .. '.__..: si_ ._...� ri`�\ I1 (fit\ lltt t}Lti'y !,'lfiiti�\ lii�i4ltitd lr�.iii %.f3`o'•i`•.-t'L .,:;� .. -- �
4
- Contract 213 (Texas) (10-89)
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
anrWv9%&m ra+
F, mr% VF,
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE ISSUE DATE (MM/DDJYY)
02/24/94
PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND
CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE
DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE
Boley Featherston Insurance
P. 0. Drawer 10
Wichita Falls TX 76307
INSURED
COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
COMPANY
LETTER A TRINITY UNIVERSAL INSURANCE CO
COMPANY
LETTER B TRINITY UNIVERSAL OF KANSAS
COMPANY
LETTER C TEXAS WORKERS COMP INS FUND
PHARR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY INC COMPANY
DBA PHARR & COMPANY LETTER D NORTHBROOK PROPERTY & CASUALTY
P 0 BOX 2791 COMPANY
LUBBOCK TX 08 LETTER E
COVERAGES
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS,
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS
TR DATE (MMIDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY)
GENERAL LIABILITY
GENERAL AGGREGATE
$2, 000, 000
A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
TXP9827710
08/ 15/93
08/ 15/94 PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG.
S 1, 000, 00()
CLAIMS MADE X OCCUR.
PERSONAL a ADV. INJURY
$11000, 000
A X OWNER'S a CONTRACTOR'S PROT.
OCP9964139 iE
02/24/94
04/05/94 EACH OCCURRENCE
$1, 000, 000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire)
$50 r O00
MED. EXPENSE (Any one person)
$ 5 a 000
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
COMBINED SINGLE
$1,
B X ANY AUTO
TCA9827711
08/ 15/93
08/ 15/94 LIMIT
OOOP 000
ALL OWNED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
$
SCHEDULED AUTOS
(Per person)
X HIRED AUTOS
BODILY INJURY
$
X NON -OWNED AUTOS
(Per accident)
GARAGE LIABILITY
PROPERTY DAMAGE
$
EXCESS LIABILITY
EACH OCCURRENCE
$ 1,000,000.
A X UMBRELLA FORM
U0982771 2
08/ 15/93
08/ 15/94 AGGREGATE
$ 1,000, 000,
OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM
WORKER'S COMPENSATION
STATUTORY LIMITS
C
TSF 114395
11 /01 /93
1 1 /01 /94 E:ACH ACCIDENT
E500, QQ(} •
AND
DISEASE —POLICY LIMIT
$5007000.
EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
DISEASE —EACH EMPLOYEE
$5009 000.
OTHER
'
D BUILDERS RISK
72327572
08/15/93
08/15/94 750,000
JOBSITE
REPORTING FORM
1,500,000
OCCUR
k
I
c
DEs*0CP1 c�F PAI & S 1%2 U6 Ns v H cL P6 L8F8URRENCE/$1 000 000 AsGREOAITE
CITY OF LUBBOCK IS
NAMED AS ADDITIONAL INSURED
WITH RESPECTS TO THE
GENERAL
LIABILITY AND AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY
POLICIES.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER
CITY OF LUBBOCK
1625 13TH STREET RM L-04
LUBBOCK TX 79401
CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE
EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO
MAIL $0_ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE
LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATI
BOLEY FEATHE
' ACORD 25-S (7190) CACORD CORPORATION 19S
No Text
-0."
CONTRACT
--ow STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF LUBBOCK
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 44tth, day of February. 1994, by and between the City of Lubbock, County
of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through David R. Langston, Mayor, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to
as OWNER, and PHARR AND COMPANY. of the City of LUBBOCK. County of LUBBOCK, and the State of TEXAS.
hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed
by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby
agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows:
BID #12843 - IL N. CLAPP AND RODGERS POOL RENOVATIONS FOR S494,740.00
1' and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost
and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories
and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General
J,m, Condition of Agreement.
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given
to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the
proposal submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on
,r account thereof as provided therein.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the
year and day fast above written. I ------NI
.�' ATTEST:
� ecre
r
21 wxy t• • 2
APPROVEDAS FORM:
r I A /'� /t 7 / (%
ATTEST:
Corporate Secretary
CONTRACTOR:
PHARR AND COMPANY
COMPLETE ADDRESS:
P.O. Boa 2791
Labbock,Texas 79408
GENERAL COMMONS OF THE AGREEMENT
Poo
_P-
...
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT
OWNER
Whenever the word Owner, or the expression Party of the First Part, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be
understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas.
.r 2. CONTRACTOR
Whenever the word Contractor, or the expression Party of the Second Part, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood
to mean the person, persons, co -partnership or corporation, to -wit: PHARR AND COMPANY who has agreed to perform
the work embraced in this contract, or to his or their legal representative.
3. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shad be understood as referring to
RUSSELL HOWARD, LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT. City of Lubbock, under whose supervision these contract
1. documents, including the plants and specifications, were prepared, and who will inspect constructions; or to such other
representative, supervisor, or inspector as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement.
Engineers, supervisor or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not
directly supervise the Contractor or men acting in behalf of the Contractor.
4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
r The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Proposal, Signed
Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if
any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for his inspection in
accordance with the Notice to Bidders.
S. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES
Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of
like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of
the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like
import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative..
6. SUBCONTRACTOR
The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for
performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any
Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents,
but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor.
7. WRITTEN NOTICE
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm
or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certificd mail to the last business address
known to him who gives the notice.
,. am
9. wORK
Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies,
machinery, equipment, tools, superintendenoe, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel,
transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work
covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and
both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required,
furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described
in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer
such recognized standards.
All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract
documents.
9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED
The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the
contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to
serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
10. LAYOUT
Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work
and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The
Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other
layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications.
11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE
The Contractor shall be furnished with one copies of all Plans, Profiles and Specifications
without expense to him and he shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site.
12. RIGHT OF ENTRY
The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress of quality
of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with
the contract documents. He will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite
inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will he be responsible for the
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions
incident thereto. His efforts will be directed towards providing assurances for the Owner that the
completed project will conform to the requirements of the contract documents, but he will not be
responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. On the basis of his onsite observations, he will keep the Owner informed of the
progress of the work and will endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the
work of the Contractor.
13. LINES AND GRADES
All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever necessary for the
commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the
work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend
14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY
Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative
shall review all work included herein. He has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to
insure the proper execution of the contract. In order to permit delays and disputes and to discourage litigation, it is further
agreed that the Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work
which are to be paid for under this contract. He shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction
thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of
said Contractor. The Owner's Representatives's estimates and findings shall be conditions precedent to the right of the
parties hereto to arbitration or to any action on the contract, and to any rights of the Contractor to receive any money under
this contract; provided, however, that should Owner's Representative render any decision or give any direction, which in the
opinion of either party hereto, is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with
said Owner's Representative within 30 days his written objection to the decision or direction so rendered, and by such action
may reserve the right to submit the questions so raised to arbitration as hereinafter provided. It is the intent of this
Agreement that there shall be no delay in the execution of the work, therefore, written decisions or direction of the Owner's
Representative as rendered shall be promptly carried out, and any claim arising therefrom shall be thereafter adjusted to
arbitration as hereinafter provided.
The Owner's Representative shall, within a reasonable time, render and deliver to both the Owner and the Contractor a
written decision on all claims of the parties hereto and on all questions which may arise relative to the execution of the work
or the interpretation of the contract, specifications and plans. Should the Owner's Representative fail to make such decision
within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the party
appealing.
r
15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION
It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time
such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the
materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is
done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance
required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The
Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so
appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying
plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer,
supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within six (6) days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for his
decision.
r 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE
The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the
*� work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's
Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be
binding as if given to the Contractor. Adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor
is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations
of the Contractor.
The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all
risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Owner or Owner's Representatives will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any
subcontractors, or any of his agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work.
17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature and location of
the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions,
and all other matters which in any way effect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall effect or modify any of
the terms or obligations herein contained
18. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent men, skillful in the performance in thi type of work required
under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform him in writing that
any man or men on the work, are, in his opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, or disorderly, such man or men shall be
discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written
consent.
19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT
The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and
completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also
understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials,
tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted.
The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's
Representative shall direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be
maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative.
20. SANITATION
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be
constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's
Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced.
21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING
The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all reasonable times to observe and test the work. Contractor
shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location
wherever work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be
contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be
ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any work found to be defective or not in
accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such
errors and regardless of whether Owner's Observer has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any
work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's
Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being
fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make
observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require
Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons
competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such
tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other
applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents.
r
If any work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the
Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for
observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by
the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests,
inspections or approval, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approval but does not meet the
requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective. Such defective work shall be corrected at the
Contractor's expense.
Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's
Representative, or other persons authorized under this agreement to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve
the Contractor from his obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents.
22. DEFECTS AND TBEIR REMEDIES
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or
selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owners' Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with
plans, specification and contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's
Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such wort: so that it shall be in full
accordance with this contract. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at
Contractor's expense.
23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line,
grade, form dimensions, plans or or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after
the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for
damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they inCrease the amount of work, and the
increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity
actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be
paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any
work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for
any material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual expenses incurred in
preparation for the work as originally planned.
24. EXTRA WORK
The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the
Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work
as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's proposal, except as
provided under Changes and Alterations herein.
It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when
rpresented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor
to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to
the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods:
Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then
the Contractor shall be paid the actual field cost of the work, plus fifteen (15%) per cent.
In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply
and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics
and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used
on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on
account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property
Damage and Workmen's Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the
Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of
the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The
Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type
and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 1000/0, unless
otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General
Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15016) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall
cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements
of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or
Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same
shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any
orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which he should receive compensation or an
adjustment in the construction time, he shall make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order
authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to
the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the
work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost
thereof, as provided under Method (C). The Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to
arbitration as herein below provided.
25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS
It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work described in the proposal, the specifications, plans and
other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all
appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by
Owner's Representative. If the Contractor finds any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract
documents, he should notify the Owners' Representative and obtain a clarification before the bids are received, and if no
such request is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be considered that the
Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in his proposal to complete the work
in accordance with these plans and specifications. It is further understood that any request for clarification must be
submitted no later than five days prior to the opening of bids.
26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT
If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work
with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in
writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order.
If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor
shall, if so ordered in writing, increase his force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of
compliance with the schedule of progress.
r
r -
27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC
The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workmen's Compensation Insurance with an insurance
rcompany licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workmen's Compensation
laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and
others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building
and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the
"Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible
with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, his sureties and insurance carriers shall defend,
indemnify and save harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees from all suits, actions, or claims of any
character whatsoever, brought for or on account of any injuries or damages received or sustained by any person or persons
or property, on account of any negligent act or fault of the Contractor or any subcontractor, their agents or employees, in the
execution and supervision of said contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract, on account of the
failure of Contractor or any subcontractor to provide necessary barricades, warning lights, or signs and will be required to
pay any judgment with costs which may be obtained against the Owner or any of its officers, agents, or employees including
attorney's fees.
The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in his sole discretion as an Independent
Contractor, inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the
Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the
Contractor of his duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the
Contractor or any of his subcontractors.
r 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE
The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as
.» hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried
with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection
with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering
the operation of each subcontractor.
k
A. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $500,000 Combined Single
Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include:
Premises and Operations
Explosion & Collapse Hazard
Underground Damage Hazard
Products & Completed Operations Hazard
G,
Contractual Liability
Independent Contractors Coverage
Personal Injury (with exclusion "c" waived)
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job, and copy of the endorsement
doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
r
ik
B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance.
The Contractor shall obtain an Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance policy naming the City
of Lubbock as insured and the amount of such policy shall be as follows:
For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $500.000 Combined Single Limit.
C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than;
Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000 Combined Single Limit,
to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned
Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the
endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
D. Builder's Risk Insurance
The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of (100% of potential loss) naming the
City of Lubbock as insured.
E. Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall have Excess or Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $500,000 with coverage to
correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages.
The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement
doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance.
F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance _
Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000
G. Proof of Coverage
Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for
approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of
compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance
company setting forth:
(1) The name and address of the insured.
(2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. '
(3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such
certificate.
(4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such
certificate.
(5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the
address shown in the bid specifications.
r•
(6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of
the policies shown on the certificate.
(7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job
specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable.
(8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project
7
t 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES
r• Contractors having more than 15 employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree
not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to
job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and
other terms, conditions, and priviliges of employment.
30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALNIEN, AND FURNISHERS OF
MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of any demands of
subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment,
power tools, all suppliers, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this contract. When
Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated
have been paid, discharged or waived.
If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those
designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (S) days after
demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, withhold from the
unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to
discharge any such indebtedness.
Any and all communications between any party under this paragraph must be in writing.
c
31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION
PON The contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or
process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or Owner thereof. The
Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the
0116 Owner harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be
responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer
or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate
design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless
from any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified or required by Owner is an infringement, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives written notice to the: Owner of such infringement.
0-01 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES
' The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations,
which in any manner effect the contract or the work, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any claims
arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor or his employees. If the
Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Owners'
Representative in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work.
r
R
If the Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without
such notice to the Owner's Representative, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the
same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into
contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein.
33. ASSIGNMENT AND SUBLETTING
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal attention to the fulfillment of _
this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in
the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner, as provided by this
contractual agreement.
34. THAE FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and
time for completion as specified in the contract of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it
is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced on a date to be
specified in the Notice to Proceed.
If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to complete the work within the time herein specified, or any proper
extension thereof granted by the Owner, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding
of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $500.00 (Five
Hundred PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each
and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for completing the work.
It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the
work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic
change and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality.
The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability and
extreme difficulty in fixing and ascertaining actual damages the Owner would in such event sustain, and the amount is
agreed to be damages the Owner would sustain and shall be retained by the Owner from current periodical estimates for
payments or from final payment.
It is further agreed and understood between the Contractor and Owner that time is of the essence of this contract.
35. TWE AND ORDER OF COMPLETION
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be
allowed to prosecute his work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most
conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the
work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications,
and within the time of completion designated in the proposals; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work
done, either by contract or by his own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing
work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the
Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which
shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the
several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts.
r
36. EXTENSION OF M413
The Contractor agrees that he has submitted his proposal in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this
project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has
considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 33 hereinabove set forth and that he shall not be entitled to, nor
will he request, an extension of time on this contract, except when his work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the
Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the owner, or by changes ordered
in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. The Contractor may apply in writing for
an extension of time, submitting therewith'all written justification as may be required by Owner's Representative for such an
extension as requested by Contractor. The Owner's Representative within ten (10) days after receipt of a written request for
an extension of time by the Contractor supported by all requested documentation shall then submit such written request to
the City Council of the City of Lubbock for their consideration. Should the Contractor disagree with the action of City
Council on granting an extension of time, such disagreement shall be settled by arbitration as hereinafter provided.
37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS
.. In executing the contract agreement, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein
fixed, he has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether
growing out of delays in securing material or workmen or otherwise. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for
hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the
work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such
expense as in the judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to
Contractor.
38. OUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid
contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided.In the event this contract is let
on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other
contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the
estimated quantities are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract,
they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their
proposals offered for the work. It is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to
be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this
contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the
project.
39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY
a
The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered,
r- which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any
damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on
account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. The Contractor agrees to indenuufy, save and hold harmless the
0- Owner against any claim or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or growing
out of the performance of this contract, but such indemnity shall not apply to any claim of any kind arising out of the
existence or character of the work.
40. PRICE FOR WORK
In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the
Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and
stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the proposal attached hereto,
which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all
materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by him and for well and truly
r
4 ,
performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications,
plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative.
41. PAYMENTS
No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either
wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at
any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate
showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made,
Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by
reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a
waiver of all claims against Owner which have not theretofore been timely filed as provi led in this contract.
42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS
On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial
payment. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment and the progress of the work made by
the Contractor and if found to be in order shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical
the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month; said statement
shall also include the value of all sound materials delivered on site of the work that are to be fabricated into the work.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's
Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final
payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of this --
agreement. It is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion, and this fact is certified to by
Owner's Representative and some unexpected and some unusual delay occurs due to no fault or negligence on the part of the
Contractor, the Owner may upon written recommendation of Owner's Representative pay a reasonable and equitable portion
of the retained percentage due Contractor.
43. FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE
Within thirty-one (31) days after the Contractor has given the Owner's. Representative written notice that the work has been
completed or substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and the Owner shall inspect the work and within said
time, if the work be found to be completed or substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the
Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor his certificate of completion, and thereupon it shall be the
duty of the Owner within thirty-one (31) days to issue a certificate of acceptance of the work to the Contractor.
44. FINAL PAYMENT
Upon the issuance of the certificate of completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement and
prepare a final statement of the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the terms of the agreement, and
shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31st day after the date of certificate of
completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement, provided he has fully performed his contractual
obligations under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become due in any event upon said performance by the
Contractor. Neither the certificate of acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall
relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the special conditions (if
any) of this contract or required in the specifications made a part of this contract.
45. CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT FOR WORK
Contractor shall promptly remove from Owners' premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on
account of failure to conform to the contract, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at his
own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the
contract. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or
I
rreplacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written
notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense.
j 46. CORRECTION OF WORK AFTER FINAL PAYMENT
Neither the final payment nor certificate nor any provision in this contract shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for
faulty materials or workmanship, and he shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work
resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. The Owner
or the Owner's Representative shall give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness.
r47. PAYMENT WITHHELD
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certificate to
r" such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss on account of.
(a) Defective work not remedied.
(b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims.
(c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor.
(d) Damage to another contractor.
When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, which will
protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them.
48. TWE OF FILING CLAIMS
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in
writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) days after the Owner's Representative has given any
directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. The Owners' Representative shall reply to
such written exceptions by the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal
from the decision of the Owner's Representative, any demand for arbitration shall be filed with the Owner's Representative
and the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the final decision of the Owner's
Representative. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner and the acceptance by the Contractor of
` the final payment shall be a bar to any claim by either party, except where noted otherwise in the contract documents.
49. ARBITRATION
All questions of dispute under this agreement shall be submitted to arbitration at the request of either party to the dispute.
.� The parties may agree upon one arbitrator, otherwise, there shall be three; one named in writing by each party and the third
chosen by the two arbiters selected; or if the arbiters fail to select a third within ten (10) days, he shall be chosen by the
District Judge, 72nd Judicial District of Texas. Each arbiter shall be a resident of the City of Lubbock. Should the party
`o demanding arbitration fail to name an arbiter within ten (10) days of the demand, his right to arbitrate shall lapse, and the
o decision of the Owner's Representative shall be final and binding on him. Should the other party fail to choose an arbiter
within ten (10) days, the Owner's Representative shall appoint such arbiter. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply
the arbiters with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbiters are empowered by both parties to take Ex
I Parte Proceedings.
The arbiters shall act with promptness. The decision of any two shall be binding on both parties to the contract, unless
either or both parties shall appeal within ten (10) days from date of the award by the arbiters, and it is hereby agreed that
each party shall have the right of appeal and all proceedings shall be according to and governed by Arbitration Statutes of
Texas, being Article 224, et seq., Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes. THE DECISION OF THE ARBITERS UPON ANY
L
QUESTION SUBMITTED TO ARBITRATION UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE A CONDITION PRECEDENT
TO ANY RIGHT OF LEGAL ACTION.
The arbiters, if they deem the case demands it, are authorized to award the party whose contention is sustained, such sums
as they deem proper for the time, expense and trouble incident to the appeal, and if the appeal was taken without reasonable
cause, they may award damages for any delay occasioned thereby. The arbiters shall fix their own compensation, unless
otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The
award of the arbiters must be made in writing and shall not be open to objection on account of the form of proceedings or
award
50. ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days after written notification from
the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or if the Contractor fails to comply with the orders of the Owner's Representative,
when such orders are consistent with this contract, this Agreement, or the Specifications hereto attached, then the Surety on
the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the
Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment,
tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for
work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of
the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra
Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of
such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
In case the Surety should fail to commence compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for within ten
(10) days after service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the following
elective manners:
(a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said
Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment,
tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the
Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under
and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under
this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference.
In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had
been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or his Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to
the Owner; or
(b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a
general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under
substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to
the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase
shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. However, should the cost to
complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work
under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certificates of
completion and acceptance, as provided in paragraph 42 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized
statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and
delivered to Contractor and his Surety, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the
balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certificate of completion.
,.� In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the
cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor
and/or his Surety shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools,
materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety. Should the cost to
complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner
within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the
site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the
-► Contractor and his Surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written
notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be
held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect
such property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools,
materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety. Such sale
may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the *jobsite and belong to persons other than the
Contractor or his Surety, to their proper owners.
51. ABANDONMENT BY OWNER
rIn case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail or refuse to comply with said terms
M within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the
work, and may remove therefrom all machinery, tools, and equipment, and all materials on the ground that have not been
included in payments to the Contractor and have not been incorporated into the work. Thereupon, the Owner's
jRepresentative shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which estimate shall include the value
of all work actually completed by said Contractor at the prices stated in the the attached proposal, the value of all partially
.• completed work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all Extra Work performed at the prices agreed upon, or
provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the cost of any provisions made by the Contractor
to carry the whole work to completion, and which cannot be utilized. The Owner's Representative shall then make a final
statement of the balance due the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and
all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this Agreement, and shall certify same to the Owner
t who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance
shown by said final statement as due the Contractor, under the terms of this Agreement.
77 52. BONDS
The successful bidder shall be required to furnish a performance bond and payment bond in accordance with Article 5160,
Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes in the amount of 1001/o of the total contract price, in the event said contract price exceeds
$25,000.00. If the contract price does not exceed $25,000.00, the statutory bonds will not be required. All bonds, if
required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to
do business in the State of Texas. And it is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so
furnished.
r 53. SPECIAL CONDITIONS
In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict
9•p-
with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control.
1 54. LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES
Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or
from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the same, or from unusual
obstructions or difficulties which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the
Contractor at his own cost and expense.
55. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct,
supervise, and control his own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The
fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during his performance and
to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative
hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent
contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other
person, firm, or corporation.
56. CLEANING UP
The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the
completion of the work he shall remove all such debris and also his tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may
remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor.
CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS
Kesolution 0'2502
` • January 8, 1987
r- Agenda Item #18
i
DGV:da
r. RESOLUTION
WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general
prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or
mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock
in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann.Civ.St., Art. 5159a; and
WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719
enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February
23, 1984; and
` WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order
to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE:
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK:
THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works
.contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which
exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents
and purposes:
Exhibit A: Building Construction'Trades
Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Trades
Exhibit C: Electrical Trades
Exhibit 0: Overtime Rate
Exhibit E: Weekend and Holiday Rate
Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing
rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken
on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in
all public works contracts as provided by law.
Passed by the City Council this 8th day of January 1987.
. e- )l =)XZ04-04
B.C. McMINN, MAYOR
. iTE
Ranett6,.-Boyd, City Secretary
APPROVED T, NTENT: APPROVED AS TO FORM:
Bill-P yne, D rector of Building Do ld G. Vandiver, First
Services Assistant City Attorney
t
EXHIBIT A
City of Lubbock
Building Construction Trades
Prevailing Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Acoustical Ceiling Installer
$11.60
Air Conditioner Installer
8.35
Air Conditioner Installer -Helper
5.50
Bricklayer
10.50
Bricklayer -Helper
5.00
Carpenter
11.00
Carpenter -Helper
5.50
Cement Finisher
7.35
Drywall Hanger
8.70
Electrician
10.50
Electrician -Helper
5.25
Equipment Operator -
Heavy
8.00
Light
5.70
Floor Installer
8.00
Glazier
7.50
Insulator, Piping/Boiler
9.50
Insulator -Helper
5.00
Iron worker
7.30
Laborer, General
4.75
Mortar Mixer
5.60
Painter.
8.75
Plumber
9.25
Plumber -Helper
6.00
Roofer
7.65
Roofer -Helper
4.75
Sheet Metal worker
8.75
Sheet Metal Worker -Helper
5.50
Welder - Certified
8.00
EXHIBIT B
Paving and Highway Construction
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft
Asphalt Heaterman
Asphalt Shoveler
Concrete Finisher
Concrete Finisher -Helper
Electrician
Flagger
Form Setter
Form Setter -Helper
Laborer, General
Laborer, Utility
Mechanic
Mechanic -Helper
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATORS
Asphalt Paving Machine
Bulldozer
Concrete Paving Machinist
Front End Loader
Heavy Equipment Operator
Light Equipment Operator
Motor Grade Operator.
Roller
Scraper
Tractor
Truck Driver -
Light
Heavy
Hourly Rate
$5.25
4.75
7.35
4.75
10.50
4.75
6.50
5.50
4.75
5.80
6.50
6.00
6.00
5.25
6.50
5.85
6.40
6.40
8.00
5.25
5.25
5.50
5.25
5.25
t
EXHIBIT C
Electric Construction Trades
Prevailing Wage Rates
Craft Hourly Rate
Power Line Foreman $11.00
Lineman Journeyman 10.45
Lineman Apprentice Series 8.90
Groundman Series 7.25
EXHIBIT D
Prevailing Wage Rates
Overtime Rate
' The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) is l 1/2
times base rate.
EXHIBIT E
Prevailing Wage Rates
Weekend and Holiday Rate
The rate for weekend and holiday is.l 1/2 times base rate.
SPECIFICATIONS
K. N. CLAPP POOL RENOVATION (92174)
SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
ARCHITECT/STRUCTURAL
Section Pacres
01050
Final Cleaning
2
01300
Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples
3
01600
Materials
3
02070
Selective Demolition
5
02110
Site Clearing
2
02200
Earthwork
9
03300
Concrete Work
17
03721
Repair Mortar
4
04200
Unit Masonry
13
04230
Reinforced Unit Masonry
4
05500
Metal Fabrications
8
06100
Rough Carpentry
5
06400
Architectural Woodwork
7
07900
Joint Sealers
7
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
6
08710
Finish Hardware
6
09900
Painting
12
10420
Specialty Signs
3
10800
Toilet Accessories
4
13130
Metal Building Components
5
13152
Swimming Pool Equipment
3
MECHANICAL
Section Pages
15000 General Provisions for Plumbing and Electrical 7
15100 Plumbing 5
15200 Pool Filtration and Circulation System 6
ELECTRICAL
Section Pages
16000 Electrical 16
SECTION 01050 - FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The Contractor shall use experienced workmen or professional --
cleaners for final cleaning.
Upon completion of all work, and just before request for final
inspection, the Contractor shall have all construction areas or
spaces cleaned and in such condition that the owner will have no
further cleaning requirements.
Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in
sections of Division 2 through Division 16. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations.
The following are examples, but not limitations of cleaning
levels required:
Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
Clean transparent materials, including windows and transom
glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which
are noticeable as vision -obscuring materials. Replace
broken glass and damaged transparent materials.
Clean exposed face brick and other interior hard -surfaced
finishes, to a dirt -free condition, free of dust, stains,
films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural
weathering exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces
to original reflective condition.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean
and remove excess lubrication and other substances.
Remove construction debris from limited -access spaces
including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment wells,
attics and similar spaces.
Clean concrete floors in non -occupied spaces broom clean.
92174 01050 - 1
r"
I
r" Clean plumbing fixtures to a' sanitary condition, free of
stains including those resulting from water exposure.
SITE (YARDS AND GROUNDS) CLEANING:
Sweep and remove stains from exterior concrete slabs, walks,
porches and paved areas. Also remove temporary tape, wrappings,
coatings, labels, grease, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, and
other foreign materials from exterior items and surfaces caused
by new construction operations.
Clean project site (lawns and grounds), including landscape
development areas, of all debris and foreign substances. Rake
grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even -
textured surface. Remove excess fill and fine grade around all
new site utility construction. Repair all areas damaged by
vehicle traffic or other construction operations.
RUBBISH•
t*, All debris, surplus material, and other items specified or
t indicated for removal and not claimed by the Owner as salvaged
materials shall become property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner.
END OF SECTION 01050
r
92174
01050 - 2
7
SECTION 01300 - SHOP DRAWINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
GENERAL•
Submit to the Architect shop drawings, product data and samples
required by specification sections.
Prepare and submit a list of required submittal of Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples. List submittal items in numerical order
of specification section numbers.Identify each submittal in list
with an item number, specification section number, name of
product and type of submittal -(Shop Drawings, Product Data,
Samples). Include dates for submission and need dates for each
item.
SHOP DRAWINGS•
Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor,
supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the
work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection data
prepared by a qualified detailer.
PRODUCT DATA•
Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: Modify drawings to
delete information which is not applicable to Project.
Supplement standard information to provide additional information
applicable to Project.
Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules,
performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive
data:
Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials,
products or models.
Show dimensions and clearances required.
Show performance characteristics and capacities.
Show wiring diagrams and controls.
SAMPLES:
Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment and
workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work
is judged.
Field samples and mock-ups: Erect at Project site at location
acceptable to Architect.
92174 01300 - 1
,
Construct each sample or mock-up complete including work of all,
trades required in finished work.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES:
Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to
submission to Architect. Initial, sign, or stamp, certifying to
review of submittal.
Verify the following:
Field measurements.
Field construction criteria.
Catalog numbers and similar data.
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and
contract documents.
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittal
is not relieved by Architect's review of submittal.
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittal from
requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's
review of submittal, unless Architect gives written acceptance of
specific deviations .
Notify Architect, in writing. at time of submission, of
deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract
Documents.
Begin no work which requires submittal until return of submittal
with Architect's stamp and initials or signature indicating
review.
After Architect's review, distribute copies.
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:
Schedule submissions at least 30 days before date reviewed
submittal will be needed, in accordance approved submittal
schedule.
Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires
for distribution, plus 3 copies which will be retained by
Architect.
Submit number of samples specified in each of specification
sections.
Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate,
containing the following:
92174 01300 - 2
Date.
Project title and number.
Contractor's name and address.
The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Sample submitted.
Notification of deviations from Contract
Other pertinent data.
Submittals shall include the following:
Date and revision dates.
Project Title.
Name of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and
manufacturer.
Identification of product or material.
Relation to adjacent structure or materials.
Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
Applicable reference standards.
Other pertinent data required by Specifications.
Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to
review of submittal, verification of field measurements
and compliance with Contract documents.
Space large enough to accept Architect's approval stamp.
RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:
Shop Drawings: Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit
specified for initial submittal.
Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other
than those requested by Architect.
Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as required
for initial submittal.
DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTAL AFTER REVIEW:
Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry
Architect's stamp as required for construction, including
Contractor's file, job site file, record documents file, other
prime contractors, subcontractors, supplier and fabricator.
END OF SECTION 01300
92174 01300 - 3
r
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS
L
UNAVAILABILITY OR LATE DELIVERIES:
Contractor shall order and schedule delivery of materials in
ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item is found
to be unavailable, Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer
immediately to permit mutual selection of suitable substitute. If
Contractor fails to order materials in ample time to avoid delays
in construction, an approved material shall be substituted at no
extra cost to the Owner. Or, at the Architect/Engineer's
discretion, approval of a substitute will be given only upon
agreement by the Contractor to remove substituted material at a
later date agreeable to Owner, and replace it at Contractor's
expense with material originally specified. Such approval shall
be subject to the same terms as for "Substitutions".
MATERIAL TESTING:
Laboratory tests and inspections specified or required of
material and - finish articles incorporated in the work shall be
made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the
Architect/Engineer. Reports will be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer or distributed as established at the
preconstruction conference. Cost of testing and inspections will
be paid for by the owner.
Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all
reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary for safe
and convenient inspection and tests required by the
Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be performed in
manner not to delay work unnecessarily. Contractor will be
charged with cost of extra inspection when material or work is
not ready at time inspection is required.
Test samples as Architect/Engineer may deem necessary shall be
procured from material or equipment delivered for use in the
work. If any test sample fails to meet specification
requirements:
Previous approval may be withdrawn and such material or equipment
f" may be subject to removal and replacement by Contractor at his
expense with material or equipment meeting specification
requirements.
Architect/Engineer may refuse consideration of further samples of
same brand or make for testing. In any case, Owner will pay cost
of only one additional test of material for same usage; should
second sample of same or like material also fail test, Contractor
shall bear cost of all further testing until Architect/Engineer's
approval is granted.
92174 01600 - 1
At Owner's discretion, defective material and equipment may be
permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of Contract
price.
MATCHING MATERIALS: Materials required to match existing work and
not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in
quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be
comparable to adjacent existing work. The Owner shall be the sole
authority in the determination of an acceptable match.
SPECIFIED ITEMS - SUBSTITUTIONS:
In addition to the requirements of General Conditions Article V,
5.13 the following applies:
Whenever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names,
followed by the designation "or equal" are used in conjunction
with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned
in these specifications, they are used to establish the standards
of quality and utility required. Substitutions which are equal in
quality and utility to those specified will be approved, subject
to the following provisions: All substitutions must be approved
by the Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing. For this purpose
the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer within 30
calendar days after recording of the Contract, a typewritten list
containing a description of each proposed substitute item or
material. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, literature or other
detailed information as will demonstrate to the
Architect/Engineer that the proposed substitute is equal in
quality and utility to the material specified shall be appended
to this list. The Architect/Engineer will approve after receiving
written concurrence from the Owner, in writing, such proposed
substitutions as are, in his opinion, equal in quality
and utility to the times or materials specified. Such approval
shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and the
Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for any
changes resulting from his proposed substitutions which affect
other parts of the work.
Failure of the Contractor to submit proposed substitutions for
approval in the manner described and within the time prescribed
shall be sufficient cause for disapproval by the
Architect/Engineer or any substitutions otherwise proposed.
Whenever catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names are
not followed by the designation "or equal" or used in conjunction
with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned
in these specifications, no substitutions will be approved.
SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitutions of any materials other than those
specifically called for shall be submitted to the
92174 01600 - 2
7,
r" Architect/Engineer for approval.
ITEMS SPECIFIED BY TRADE NAME: Reference to items by specific
trade name is made as a basis of quality and function. Equivalent
items may be used in their stead; however, the right of
determining such quality shall remain with the Owner's
Representative. The terms "similar to", "approved", or "or equal"
or similar phrases shall be interpreted similarly.
LABELS: Manufacturer's or trade names together with model or
serial designations, grade markings, fire ratings, etc. will be
permitted and are required on certain components of the work.
These items shall be placed in concealed, but accessible
locations, and absolutely no labels advertising any manufacturer
or trade name will be permitted on exposed portions of components
without written authorization from Architect/Engineer.
MATERIALS STORAGE:
The Contractor will be allowed space on the grounds for the
storage of his materials, but he shall provide all necessary
enclosures, doors, and locks, and he shall be solely responsible
for the safekeeping of all materials, tools, etc., stored
therein.
Such storage facilities shall be moved when so directed by the
Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. After completion
of the work, they shall be completely removed and all materials
taken from the premises.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be
applied, installed, connected, erected, secured, used, cleaned
r, and put in operation as recommended, directed or specified by the
manufacturer, for the type of installation called for.
r. Where work is specified to be in accordance with product
manufacturer's directions, Contractor shall procure such
information in sufficient quantities to supply interested
parties.
TEST REPORT COPIES:
The testing laboratory agency shall supply copies of all tests,
reports, and inspections to the following:
Architect - 2 copies
General Contractor - 2 copies
Consulting Structural Engineers - 1 copy.
END OF SECTION 01600
92174 01600 - 3
SECTION 02070 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section. _
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of demolition work is shown on drawings.
Types of Selective Demolition Work: Demolition requires the
selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the —
following:
Portions of existing building slab and structure indicated _
on drawings and as required to accommodate new construction.
Portions of existing concrete pool deck and edge, to include
existing concrete diving platforms.
Removal of existing exterior free standing items such as
concrete tables and steel pipe guard stands.
Removal and salvage of existing pool ladders, rails and
anchor sockets to be reused or relocated where indicated on
drawings.
Removal work specified elsewhere:
Cutting non-structural concrete floors and masonry walls for
underground piping and ducts, and for above grade piping,
ducts, and conduit is included with the work of the
respective mechanical and electrical Divisions 15 and 16
specification sections.
Related work specified elsewhere: --
Remodeling construction work and patching is included
within the respective sections of specifications, including _
removal of materials for re -use and incorporated into
remodeling or new construction.
Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, other mechanical and —
electrical work are specified by respective trades.
92174 02070 - 1
SUBMITTALS:
Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and
sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's
Representative for review prior to commencement of work. Include
coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility
services as required, together with details for dust and noise
control protection.
Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to
ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on -site operations.
Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of
existing building, and with Owner's occupancy of completed
new addition.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the
building (shop and party room) immediately adjacent to areas of
selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in
manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal
operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner
of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's
normal operations.
Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed
C" but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from structure
as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they
are removed.
Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be
permitted.
Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of
protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and
general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
Provide protective measures as required to provide free and
safe passage of Owner's personnel and general public to and
from occupied portions of building.
Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support
to prevent movement, settlement, -or collapse of structure or
element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to
remain.
Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain
in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.
Provide floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
92174 02070 - 2
s
Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions
where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive
dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions
with dustproof doors and security locks if required. -
Provide temporary weather protection during interval between
demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior
surfaces, and installation of new construction to insure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or
interior areas of existing building.
Remove protections at completion of work.
Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities
by.demolition work at no cost to Owner.
Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris
removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or
other occupied or used facilities without written permission
from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate
routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by _governing regulations.
Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to
remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during
demolition operations.
CART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION•
Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas
in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions
to structure surfaces, equipment or to surrounding properties
which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective
demolition work; file with Owner's Representative prior to
starting work.
PREPARATION•
Provide interior and exterior shoring., bracing, or support to
prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be
demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
Cease operations and notify the Owner's Representative
immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered.
92174 02070 - 3
r
r' Take precautions to
4 made for continuing
support structure
operations.
until determination is
Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain
from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms
or areas from which such items have not been removed.
Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services that
are not indicated to remain.
�^ Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain
+ continuity of service to occupied areas of building.
Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-
down of service is necessary during change -over.
DEMOLITION•
r" Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use
(. such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings
in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
r
k Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut
concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to
r remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not
M use power -driven impact tools where existing concrete is to
remain.
Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and
promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on
supporting walls, floors or framing.
Provide services for effective air and water pollution
controls as required by local authorities having
jurisdiction.
Completely remove concrete diving stands and base. Remove
all other concrete items to a depth of not less than 12"
below existing surface.
Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from
demolition work. Provide and compact new fill in accordance
with Division 2 requirements.
If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements
which conflict with intended function or design are encountered,
investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict.
Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate
detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative
rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue
overall job progress without delay.
92174
02070 - 4
ALVAGE MATERIALS:
Salvage Items: All items not indicated on Drawings to be reused
or relocated, shall be stockpiled or otherwise made accessible to the Owner prior to removal. The Owner shall retain the option to
claim any and all such items. Any items claimed shall be
stockpiled or otherwise made accessible to the Owner who will _
transport same to his warehouse for, storage. All items not
claimed by the Owner shall become the 'property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from the site.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
Remove debris, rubbish and other materials resulting from
demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally
dispose of materials off site.
Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project
site.
CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR:
Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and
demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave
interior areas broom clean.
Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return
structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to
commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent
construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective
demolition work.
END OF SECTION 02070
92174 02070 - 5
r SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of site clearing is shown on drawings.
Site clearing includes, but is not limited to:
Clearing and grubbing.
Removing above -grade improvements.
Removing below -grade improvements.
JOB CONDITIONS•
Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets,
walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission
from authorities having jurisdiction.
Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections
necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to
remain in place.
Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's
property.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as
acceptable to parties having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable to work of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SITE CLEARING•
General: Remove shrubs, grass and other vegetation,
improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of
new construction. Remove such items elsewhere on site or
premises as specifically indicated.
92174 02110 - 1
I
Clearing and Grubbing: Clear trees, shrubs and other vegetation,
except for those indicated to be left standing, which conflict
with new construction operations.
Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding
through ground surface.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with
satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or
earthwork is indicated.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding
6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a density
equal to adjacent original ground.
Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -
grade improvements necessary to permit construction, and other
work as indicated.
Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits
may be shown on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is
included under work of those sections. Removal of abandoned
underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is
included under this section.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS:
Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on Owner's
property.
Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and
unsuitable and excess topsoil from owner's property and dispose
of off site in a legal manner.
END OF SECTION 02110
92174 02110 - 2
f
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings.
Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and other
exterior concrete flatwork is included as part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within building and/or swimming pool lines
is included as part of this work.
-
QUALITY ASSURANCE•
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with
applicable requirements of governing authorities having
jurisdiction.
r. Testing and Inspection Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense,
testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service
for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The
testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
r' D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction.
SUBMITTALS•
Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to the Engineer
from the testing services, with copies to the Contractor.
Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil
encountered.
Atterberg Limits
Linear Shrinkage
Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve
Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills.
Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is
used.
02200 - 1
JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information: A subsurface soils investigation at the site has
not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations
may be made by the Contractor at no additional.cost to the Owner.
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas
of work._ If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate
means of protection during earthwork operations.
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or. other utilities
be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in
keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and
used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the
Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services
have been provided.
Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade ,open excavations
occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities; sidewalks, and other facilities from
damage caused by. settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS:
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM,
SW and SP.
Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT.
Topsoil shall be fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of
clay lumps, stones and debris.
Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of
clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris,
waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.
Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the
plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12.
02200 2
E
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXCAVATION•
Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered
when establishing required finish grade elevations.
Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of obstructions
visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities
indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any
classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and
other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized
excavation.
9 Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific
r- direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor's
expense.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill
unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of
footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to
proper position, when acceptable to the Engineer.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required
subgrade elevations, notify the Engineer who will make an
inspection of conditions.
If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated
material as directed by the Engineer.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will
be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in
work.
Stability of Excavations
Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and
ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is
not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
02200 - 3
Shoring and Bracing: Where required, provide materials for shoring
and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and
cross -braces, in good serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply
with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time
period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses.
Sheet Piling: Where required provide permanent steel sheet piling
or pressure creosoted timber sheet piling wherever subsequent
removal of sheet piling might permit lateral movement of soil under
adjacent structures. Cut off tops as required and leave
permanently in place.
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water
from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and
surrounding area.
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and
soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary
to convey water away from excavations.
Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting
or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage
ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each
structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where
directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and
shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
Excavation for Structures:
Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of
plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from
footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for
inspection.
02200 - 4
In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to
disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just
before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
F
Excavation for Trenches:
Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to
be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of
trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert
elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches
r' sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required
elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel
prior to installation of pipe.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells
to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass
within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below
bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place
concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings.
Concrete is specified in Division 3.
Do not backf ill trenches until tests and inspections have been made
and backfilling authorized by the Engineer. Use care in
backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
Cold Weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against
freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1
degree C.)
COMPACTION:
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing
minimum percentage of density specified for each area
classification.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not
less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for
soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship
determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and
not less than the following percentages of relative density,
determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not
exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship.
02200 - 5
Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backf ill
or fill material at 95k maximum dry density or 90°s relative dry
density.
Building Slabsc Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of
backf ill or fill material at 95%- maximum dry density or 90°c
relative dry density.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90k maximum dry density.
Walkways and other Exterior Flatwork: Compact top 611 of subgrade
and each layer of backf ill or fill materials at 95t maximum dry
density or 90t relative dry density.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free
water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction
operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is
too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist
drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content
is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AND FILL: .
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required
subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below.
In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under walks and flatwork, use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material, or combination of both.
Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material.
Backfill 'excavations as promptly as work permits, but not `until
completion of the following:
Inspection, testing, approval, and recording locations of
underground utilities.
02200 - 6
i
r
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with
satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven
below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent
settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if
required.
Removal of trash and debris.
Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on
horizontally supported walls.
Ground Surface Preparation
Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,
obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior
" to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill
material will bond with existing surface.
When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up
ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture
7 content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
r Placement and Compaction:
r
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8" in
loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,
and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by
w hand -operated tampers.
r Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to
provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
r, area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to
r' required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of
backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around
structure to approximately same -elevation in each lift.
` GRADING•
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished
surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or
slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such
points and existing grades.
r- 02200 7
f
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building
lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding.
Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as
follows:
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within
not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade
elevations.
Walks and Flatwork: Shape surface of areas under walks and other
exterior flatwork to line, grade and cross-section, with finish
surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade
elevation.
Grading Surface of Fill Under Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free
of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.
Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/211 when tested with a
10 foot straightedge.
Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth
and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Quality Control Testing During Construction
Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill
layers before further construction work is performed.
Perform field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556 (Sand
Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D
2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable.
Flatwork and Building Slab Subgrade:
Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq.
ft. of paved area or building slab, but .in no case less than 3
tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test
for every 2000 sq. ft.'of overlaying building slab or paved area,
but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be
placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and
approved by the testing laboratory and the Engineer.
Foundation Wall Backfill: Take at least 2 field density tests, at
locations and elevations as directed.
If,; in opinion of the Engineer, based on testing service reports
and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense.
02200 8
MAINTENANCE•
Protection of Graded Areas:
r-+
1
L Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas
` to specified tolerances.
7 Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas
C_ are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse
weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density
prior to further construction.
i.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Removal from Owner's Property:
Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material,
r" trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
rThis section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
7
I
r
I:
i
r^
02200 - 9
3
4'
SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and "-
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The extentofconcrete work is shown on the Drawings.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings".
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, _
Transporting and Placing Concrete".
ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of
Standard Practice".
Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of
concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements,
including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the Engineer.
Design and Testing:
The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing
proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this
project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with r
all information being reported to the Engineer. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used.
Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports
for the proposed mix. _
Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Engineer so directs. The
Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders
are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take
the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and
handling including breaking of same at laboratory.
03300 - 1
A
I~ The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory
designated by the Engineer and the Owner.
All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be
e borne by the Contractor.
Test results shall be furnished to the Engineer and the Contractor.
Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further
tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never
meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be
replaced with new as directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS:
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with
application and installation instructions for proprietary materials
and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds, joint systems, and others as
requested by the Engineer.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315
"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of
bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required at openings through concrete: structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS•
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or
specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces
with plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth,
exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the
Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to
withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or
deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or
"good -as -new".
Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B
(Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better,
mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible
trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Engineer.
03300 - 2
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete Form concrete surfaces which
will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal
or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least
2 edges and one side for tight fit.
REINFORCING MATERIALS:
Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and
stirrups may be Grade 40.
Dowels for load transfer in slabs shall be plain. steel bars
conforming to ASTM A 675, Grade 80 or ASTM A 499.
Supports for Reinforcement:
Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar
type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified.
Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable.
For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal
runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs.
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
Portland Cement:
ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless
otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
Fine Aggregate
Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other
deleterious substances.
Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate
containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows:
Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run
gravel is not permitted.
Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
03300 - 3
i�
INK
r
Maximum Aggregate Size:
Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides
of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the
minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or
bundles or bars.
These limitations may be waived if, in the judgment of the
Engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are such that
concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
fly _Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F.
Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more
than 0.1% chloride ions.
rSet -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
t
Type B, Retarding.
r Type C, Accelerating.
Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding.
Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating.
Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless
otherwise authorized in writing by Engineer.
RELATED MATERIALS:
Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated
with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth
of slab.
Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections.
Concrete Curing Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Equal to
Sonosil as manufactuured by Sonneborn Building Products.
PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in
accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C' 94. Use an
independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for
preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility
shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing
unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
03300 -_4
Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project
for each clasa_of concrete required, complying with ACI.211.1. -
Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used
to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in
accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance
with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing
relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and
compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches _
which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not
less than 3 specimens tested at 28 days;, or an earlier age when
acceptable to the Engineer, to establish aach point on the curve. —
Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to
select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in _
ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be
considered suitable if the concrete production facility has
certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in
one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions.
If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are
available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at
least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of
concrete.
After sufficient experience and test data become available from the
job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation
may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3
consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not
exceed 1 in 100.
Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix for
each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do
not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the
Engineer.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following
properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules:
3000 psi 28-day compressive strength; W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum
(non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained).
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be
requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job
conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant;
at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Engineer.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results
must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in
the work.
03300 - 5
r
r ADMIXTURES•
I.
Use water -reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement
r and workability.
Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at
ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless
r otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point
of placement having air content within the following limits:
5.51a with 1 1/211 maximum aggregate
6.0t with 1" maximum aggregate
6.Ot with 3/4" maximum, aggregate
r- 7.Ot with 1/2" maximum aggregate
Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's directions.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust
quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
SLUMP LIMITS•
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the
point of placement as follows:
Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 311.
Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than
311.
All Other Concrete: Not more than 411.
CONCRETE MIXING:
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C
94, and as herein specified.
Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to
the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water
to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid
setting of concrete, a_ shorter mixing time than specified in
ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required.
03300 - 6
When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees
F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75
minutes, and'when the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FORMS:
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support
vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads
can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation and position.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or
damage to cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
Forms shall not leak cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying
against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking
plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide
top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place
concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and
for easy removal.
Provide temporary openings where interior ° area of formwork is
inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete
placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete
mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous
locations. -
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC
or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines
and tight edge joints.
Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or
snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and
to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
Unless otherwise shown,provide ties so portion remaining within
concrete after removal is at least •1 1/2" inside concrete. Unless
otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes
larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork
to accommodate work for other trades'. Determine size and location
of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
03300 7
N
i
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent
surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or
r other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after
I concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
PLACING REINFORCING:
Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and
other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against
r- displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required.
r Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for
concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
r' placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into
concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
JOINTS:
Construction Joints:
Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the
Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the
structure, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in
walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads
designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Continue all reinforcement across construction joints.
Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or
patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms
as detailed on the Drawings.
Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in
slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground
and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams and elsewhere as indicated.
03300 - 8
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the
items to be attached thereto.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or
bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the
required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface.
Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types
of screed required. Aligntheconcrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted
compacting type screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES;
Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound
before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation --
form-coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely
affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment
of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting
of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds`.
Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and
in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating
material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
General•
Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened
sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as herein.specified.
Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to
avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to
be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the
installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting
such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms immediately
03300 - 9
r
before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not
used.
rPlacincr Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper than 18" and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators
r designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete,
r maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert
and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not
farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the
time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment
of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of the mix.
Placing Concrete Slabs:
Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a
panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing
operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and
strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface,
leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the
plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to
rbeginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete
placement operations.
Cold Weather Placing:
Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength
which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306-and as herein specified.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as
required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
03300 - 10
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do
not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing
frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt.and other materials containing
antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise
accepted in mix designs.
Hot Weather Placing:
When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with
ACI 305 and as herein specified.
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at
time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled,
or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature
provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too
hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form
thoroughly before placing concrete.
Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in mix
designs.
FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES:
Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not
exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless
otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with
defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and
other projections exceeding 1/411 in height rubbed 'down with wood
blocks.
Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces
exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material
applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to
the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or
other similar system. This is the as -cast concrete surface as
obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas
repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections
on the surface completely removed and smoothed.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets
and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed
surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
03300 - 11
r-�
s
otherwise shown.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that
are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter
specified.
After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work
�• surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface
water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate
surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface
plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with
a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
�^ Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,
4 refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
r1% Trowel Finish:
r
Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be
exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are
to be covered with paint or other thinfilm finish coating system.
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a
power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces
a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface:. Consolidate
concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel
marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane
tolerance not exceeding 1/8" in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot
straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
Non -Slip Broom Finish:
Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete flatwork, and
elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete
surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with the Engineer before
application.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
General:
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperature.
03300 - 12
r.
Start curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface after placing and finishing, and whn surface will
bear walking workmen or footboards with damage.
Curing Method: Perform curing of concrete by applying combination
curing hardening, and dustproofing compound.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
swimming pool gutters and other similar surfaces by moist curing
with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are
removed.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Apply Sonosil or equal, by brush
squeegee, hand or power spray in two coats allowing 1/2 to l hour
drying time per coat. See manufacturers directions.
REMOVAL OF FORMS:
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours
after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently,hard to
not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and
protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits,
joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in
less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum
compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive
strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens
representative of concrete location or members.
Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if
shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit
removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing
shores and supports.
RE -USE OF FORMS:
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work.
Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing
material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound
material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new
formwork.
When forms are intended for successive concrete placement,
thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten
forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.
Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as
acceptable to the Engineer.
03300 13
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
Fillinct-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures
for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or
directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and
cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown
or required to complete work.
Reinforced Masonrv: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry
lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as
scheduled. Grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate
location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
Patching Defective Areas:
Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Engineer.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension,
and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but,
in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement
mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen
with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement
grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
p For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will
match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous
location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair of Formed Surfaces:
Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Engineer. Surface
defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that
cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with
dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain
defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If
defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
03300 - 14
Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each
surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of
slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required
slope.
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which
adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such,
include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate
to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections
regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets,
and other objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete
has cured at least 14 days.
Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas
and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend
into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used
when acceptable to the Engineer.
Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding 1° diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete .with clean,
square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4"
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with
patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or
concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to
provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete.
Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1° in
diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out
holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat
cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack,
consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as
required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in
place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by
the Engineer.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to
acceptance of the Engineer.
03300 - 15
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all
other tests and to submit test reports.
Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of
r" concrete may include the following, as directed by the Engineer.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
•r comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens taken at point of discharge.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
,••r degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each
{ time a set of compression test specimens made.
Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens except when field -cure test specimens are: required.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu.
yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one
day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen
tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 26
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the
strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days.
When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least
5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than
50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Engineer if, in
his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85%- of
companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations
and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the
in -place concrete.
03300 - 16
Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer and the
Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete
batch in the structure,_ design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking
strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests
of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified
concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained
in the structure, as directed by the Engineer. The testing service
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any
other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable
concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
03300 - 17
SECTION 03721 REPAIR MORTAR
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY:
j This Section specifies a one -component, thixotropic, rheoplastic, cement
based, fiber reinforced, shrinkage -compensated, sulfate resistant
structural repair mortar.
This Product is designed for repairing concrete or masonry structures and
can be applied by low-pressure spraying or hand -troweling.
REFERENCES:
ASTM C 109-90 Test method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars - Modified.
ASTM A 185-85 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM C 348-91 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
ASTM C 469-87 Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
ASTM C 666-91 Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid
Freezing and Thawing.
ASTM C 806-87 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Expansive
Cement Mortar.
ASTM C 882-87 Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems
Used with Concrete -Modified.
ASTM C 1012-89 Test Method for Length of Change of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution - Modified.
ASTM C 1202-91 Electrical Indication of Resistance to Chloride Ion
Penetration.
System Performance Requirements:
Provide repair mortar that when cured produces the following properties:
Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109): Minimum, 1-day 4000 psi (31.0 MPa);
28-day 10,000 psi (69 MPa).
Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348) : Minimum, 1-day 700 psi (4.8 MPa) ; 28-day
1250 psi (8.6 MPa).
03721 - 1
s
Slant Shear Bond Strength (ASTM C 882-modified) : Minimum, 1-day 2000 psi
(13.8 MPa); 28-day 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
Permeability (ASTM C 1202): 1000 Coulombs Maximum.
Freeze -Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 666-300 cycles): minimum RDF 85%.
Sulfate Resistance (ASTM C 11012-15 weeks): 0.1 expansion (maximum
difference between control bars in water and test bars).
Restrained Expansion (ASTM C 806) : Minimum 0.03%- at 7 days, Maximum 0.1%,
at 28 days. Obtain 90%- of maximumexpansion within 24 hours.
Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM C 469) : 3.1 million psi minimum, 4.8 million
psi maximum.
Project Conditions: -
Weather Condition: Apply repair mortar only when ambient and surface
temperatures are 500 F (100 C) and rising. Do not make the repair if the
ambient temperature is expected to fall below 400 F (50 C) within 24
hours after placement. Do not apply repair mortar when ambient and
surface temperatures are 1000 F (380 C) and above.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations regarding additional installation
information (hot weather -drying conditions, or cold weather
installation).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Materials:
Repair Mortar: "EMACO S88-CA" by Master Builders, Inc., a blend of
portland cement, silica fume, specially graded aggregates, synthetic
fibers, and set -control admixtures including shrinkage compensating
.additives.
Water: Drinkable.
"Confilm", evaporation reducer and finishing aid, by Master Builders,
Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Surface Preparation:
Mechanically remove unsound concrete to the limits indicated on the
Drawings.
Remove a minimum of 1.4" (6mm) of existing concrete facing and continue �-
removal as required to expose sound aggregate. Substrate should have a
minimum amplitude of 1/411. Limit the size of chipping hammers to 15lbs.
to reduce micro fractures.
03721 - 2
d
r"
Saw -cut perimeter of the area to be repaired to a minimum depth of 1/41,
(6 mm). Do not cut existing steel reinforcement.
Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, comply with
the following:
r, Abrasive blast reinforcing steel to remove rust, scale and
contaminants to achieve a white metal finish.
If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out
behind the reinforcing to 3/4" (19 mm) minimum depth.
Splice new reinforcing steel to existing steel where corrosion has
depleted the cross-section area by 25t, as directed by the Engineer.
Thoroughly clean the roughened surface and exposed reinforcement of rust,
dirt, loose chips, and dust using high pressure water. Maintain
substrate in a saturated, surface dry condition.
Mixinct :
*- Comply with mortar manufacturer's recommendations for water quantity and
mixing procedures.
Applications:
t
is Maintain substrate in a saturated, surface dry condition.
r` For hand applications, a bond slurry coat is required.
Apply repair mortar by low-pressure wet spraying or hand -troweling on
vertical surfaces in depths ranging from 3/8" (10 mm) to 2" (50 mm).
Ei vertical Applications: Repair mortar can be spray -applied for vertical
applications up to 2" (50 mm) depth in one lift.
Multiple Passes: Place succeeding lifts after repair mortar has
t developed initial set. Scarify the surface of the first lift to ensure
integral bond between successive layers.
Fini shincr
Level surface of repair mortar using a float or screed.
f Apply final finish when mortar has begun to stiffen using a wooden,
plastic, or synthetic sponge float or trowel.
(" Spray apply undiluted "Confilm" evaporation retarder lightly to aid in
f finishing, especially in windy, hot conditions.
Curina•
Protect fresh mortar from premature evaporation. Cure finished repair
mortar by one of the following methods:
r 03721 - 3
r
E
Preferred Method: Keep area continuously moist with water as soon as
mortar surface has hardened (thumb print hard), for a minimum of seven
days.
END OF SECTION 03721
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
03721 - 4
r
• SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Requirements of this section apply to masonry work specified in
Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry".
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and
schedule.
Types of masonry work required for new construction and masonry
repairs include:
Modular face brick to match existing.
Concrete unit masonry.
Glazed tile units to match existing.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type
of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products,
including certifications that each type complies with specified
requirements.
P
Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit samples of the
following materials:
rUnit masonry samples in small scale form showing full extent
of colors and textures available for each type of exposed
masonry unit required.
Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit the following samples:
Unit masonry samples for each type of exposed masonry unit
required; include in each set the full range of exposed
color and texture to be expected in completed work.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
92174 04200 - 1
r�
I
C
0
Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants,
corrosion or other causes.
Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during
delivery and until time of installation to the maximum
percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual
relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau
Station nearest project site.
Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in
dry location.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics
can be maintained.
Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent
deterioration by corrosion and accumulation of dirt.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with
heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover
partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold
cover securely in place.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours
after building masonry walls or columns.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
building masonry walls or columns.
Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face
of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately
grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter
by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
Cold Weather Protection:
Do not lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.
Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully
applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.
Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions.
92174 04200 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
BRICK MADE FROM CLAY OR SHALE:
PW
f
General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements
indicated below applicable to each form of brick required.
Size: Provide bricks manufactured to the following actual
dimensions:
Standard Modular: 2-1/4" x 3-5/8" x 7-5/811.
Facing Brick: ASTM C 216 as follows:
r
t
Grade SW.
Type FBS (normal size and color variations).
Texture and Color: Match existing building. Texture and
color to be approved by Architect.
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements
indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit
required.
Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners,
jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other
r.,
special conditions.
Provide square -edged units for outside corners, except
where indicated as bullnose.
Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics
indicated below for Grade, Type, face size, exposed face and,
under each form included, for weight classification.
Grade N.
Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face
dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x
thicknesses indicated.
Type I, moisture -controlled units.
Exposed Faces:. Manufacturer's standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
Hollow Loadbearing Block: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
Weight Classification: Lightweight.
92174 04200 - 3
Solid Loadbearing Block: ASTM C 145 and as follows:
Weight Classification: Lightweight.
GLAZED MASONRY TILE UNITS:
Glazed Tile Units: Provide units of size and surface texture to
match existing.
Size: Manufacturer,'s standard with nominal face dimensions
of 11 1/2" long x 5" high x 3 1/2" thicknesses. Verify size
to match existing tile.
Special Shapes: Provide special shapes at following
conditions:
Wing Walls: Square -edged units for outside corners,
coordinate with existing units.
Color and Pattern: To match existing.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used
for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce required mortar color. .-
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than
1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve. —
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
Water: Clean,and potable.
JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES:
Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic
materials and with requirements indicated under each form of
joint reinforcement, tie ' and anchor for size and other —
characteristics:
92174
Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for
uncoated wire and with ASTM A 123, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per
sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after
prefabrication into units.
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Carbon steel with
04200 - 4
zinc coating complying with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation
G90.
Application: Use for dovetail Clots and where
indicated.
Hot -Dip Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, Class 2
or ASTM A 635; hot dip galvanized after fabrication to
comply with ASTM A 153; Class B.
Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded -wire units prefabricated
with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into
straight lengths of not less than 101, with prefabricated corner
and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:
Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths
of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and
partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not
less than 5/811 on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2"
elsewhere.
Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148311 diameter.
Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148311 diameter.
For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows:
Truss design with diagonal cross rods spaced not more
than 16" o.c. and number of side rods as follows:
Number of Side Rods for Composite Construction:
One side rod for each face shell of concrete
masonry back-up and one rod for brick wythe.
Tab design with single pair of side rods and
rectangular box -type cross ties spaced not more
than 16" o.c.; with side rods spaced for embedment
within each face shell of back-up wythe and ties
extended to within 1" of exterior face of facing
wythe.
Flexible Anchors: Where flexible anchors are indicated for
connecting masonry to structural framework, provide 2-piece
anchors as described below which permit vertical or horizontal
differential movement between wall and framework parallel to, but
resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to, plane or
wall.
92174
For anchorage to steel framework, provide manufacturer's
standard anchors with crimped 1/4" diameter wire anchor
section for welding to steel and triangular -shaped wire tie
section sized to extend within 1" of masonry face.
04200 - 5
Wire Size: 0.187511 diameter.
Masonry Veneer Anchors: Two-piece assemblies which permit
vertical or horizontal differential movement between wall and
framework parallel to, but resist tension and compression forces
perpendicular to, plane of wall; consisting of wire tie section
and metal anchor section for attachment over sheathing to metal
studs and complying with the following requirements.
Wire Size: 0.187511 diameter.
Wire Tie Shape: Triangular.
Wire Tie Length: As required to extend within 1" of masonry
veneer face.
Unit Type Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Furnish cast iron or
malleable iron inserts of type and size indicated.
Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail slots, with filler strips, of
slot size indicated, fabricated from 0.033611 (22 gage) sheet
metal.
Anchor Bolts: Provide steel bolts with hex nuts and flat washers
complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A, hot -dip galvanized to comply
with ASTM C 153, Class C, in sizes and configurations indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars
No. 3 to No. 18.
MASONRY CLEANERS:
Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate
(1/2 cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure)
dissolved in one gallon of water.
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose
cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated;
composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with
special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for
intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES:
General: Do not add admixtures including coloring pigments, air -
entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellant
agents, anti -freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
92174 04200 - 6
Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and
aggregate in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced
ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
r-
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specifications, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise
,.. indicated.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -
lime.
Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact
with earth, and where indicated.
Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use
in construction of reinforced and non -reinforced unit masonry.
Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated,
of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will
completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal
direction, unless otherwise indicated.
Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least
horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
,INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
�^
Wetting
Clay Brick:
Wet brick made from clay or shale which have
ASTM
C 67 initial
rates of absorption (suction) of more
than
30 grams per
30 sq. in. per minute. Use wetting methods
which
surface
ensure each
dry when laid.
clay masonry unit being nearly saturated but
Do not wet concrete
masonry units.
Cleaning
Reinforcing:
Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and
other
coatings from
reinforcing.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls, floors and other
masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-
wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry
units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of
r� other trades. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase
P or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and
recesses.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of
92174 04200 - 7
masonry work.After installation of equipment, complete masonry
work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening.
Cut masonry units using motor -driven saws to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units' as required to provide
continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size
units without cutting where possible.
Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES:
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of
columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 101, or 3/8" in a
story height not to exceed 201, nor 1/2" in 401 or more. For
external corners, expansion joints, 'control joints and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/411 in any story or 20'
maximum, not 1/211 in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head
joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 10 ", 1/2" maximum.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed
lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any bay or 20' maximum,
not 1/2" in 40" or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not
exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16"
within width of a single unit.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plain
and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not
exceed 1/2" in any bay or 20' maximum, nor 3/4" in 40' or more.
Variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and
thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1/411 nor plus 1/211.
Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/811, with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/211. Do not exceed head joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/811.
LAYING MASONRY WALLS:
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond
patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate
opening, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the
use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances,
with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
Pattern Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown or,
92174 04200 - 8
r if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in each
course centered on units in courses above and below. Lay
concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or
bonded by lapping not less than 211. Bond and interlock each
4, course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than
nominal 4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Stopping and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length in each
course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet
units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units and
mortar prior to laying fresh memory.
Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified
under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in
solidly with masonry around built-in items.
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly
with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow
masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint
below and rod mortar or grout into core.
Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3
courses (2411) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts
and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS:
Lay solid brick -size masonry units with completely filled bed and
�^ head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head
E joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
�,. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on
t horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in
t starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns
and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course
on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed including areas under cells.
Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required
to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/8"
joints.
Cut Joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or
to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than
joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in
92174 04200 — 9
fresh mortar.Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent
stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments
are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh
mortar.
Collar Joints: After each course is laid, fill in vertical
longitudinal joint between wythes solidly and with mortar for the
following masonry work:
All exterior walls, except cavity walls,.and interior walls
and partitions.
Exterior walls, except cavity walls.
Nonloadbearing interior walls or partitions where metal ties
or horizontal reinforcing are indicated for structural
bonding and nominal thickness of wall or partition is
required to meet code requirements for height -to -thickness
ratio.
STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY:
Use continuous horizontal joint reinforcement installed in
horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at _
not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course
at corners, unless otherwise shown.
For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at _
corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry
bonding.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or
control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type
of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and
space as follows:
Provide .individual metal ties at not more than 24" o.c.
vertically.
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using
prefabricated "T" units.
Intersecting Load -bearing Walls: If carried up separately, block
or tooth vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid
steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically, or omit y
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0"
o.c.' vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than
1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2'-0" long with ends turned up not less than 2"
or with cross -pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar -filled cores.
92174 04200 - 10
HORIZONTAL
JOINT REINFORCEMENT:
General:
Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as
j`
indicated.
Install longitudinal side
rods in mortar for their
((
entire
length with a minimum cover of
5/8" on exterior side of
walls,
1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing
a minimum of 611.
Cut or
interrupt joint reinforcement
at control and expansion
b
joints,
unless otherwise indicated.
i Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing
unless specifically noted to be omitted.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of
prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement
units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special
conditions.
Space continuous horizontal reinforcement as follows:
r For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous
>! horizontal reinforcement acts as structural bond or tie
between wythes, space reinforcement as required by code but
r not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
s
For sin.lq a-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c.
vertically, unless otherwise indicated.
For parapets, space reinforcement at 8" o.c. vertically,
unless otherwise indicated.
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with
horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints
approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and
immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of
2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.
In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional
reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the
above.
LINTELS:
Install steel lintels where indicated.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more
than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units
are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support
�.. formed -in -place lintels.
92174 04200 - 11
r!
i
h
For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed
U-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as
shown filled with coarse grout.
Provide minimum bearing of 8" at each jamb, unless otherwise
indicated.
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY:
Refer to Division-4 sections "Reinforced Unit Masonry" for
installation requirements applicable to reinforced unit masonry.
PARGING
Parge walls where indicated with Type S or N mortar, in thickness
indicated.
Thickness: Not less than 1/211.
Trowel finish to a smooth, dense surface. Form a wash at top of
parging and a cove at bottom. Where parging is applied in 2
_coats, roughen first coat when partially set, let harden for 24
hours and moisten prior to application of second coat.
Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect until cured.
REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING:
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped,
broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match
adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in.fresh mortar or grout, pointed to
eliminate evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or
holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar.
Point -up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work
to provide a neat, uniform appearances prepared for application
of sealants.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean
masonry as follows:
emove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles
and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel
uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain. Architect's
approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning
of -masonry.
otect adjacent stone and non -masonry surfaces from contact
92174 04200 - 12
with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking
4 agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of
cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly
with clear water.
Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA
"Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made
from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated
below.
Acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of
cleaner manufacturer.
Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry
manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek"
bulletins.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in
a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work
being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial
completion.
END OF SECTION 04200
92174
04200 - 13
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit
Masonry, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS•
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of
Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".
Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral
ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for
fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry
materials and accessories not included in this section.
Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades
complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows:
Provide Grade 60.
Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or
hooked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PLACING REINFORCING:
General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice
or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do
not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the
Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section
due to excessive rusting or other causes.
04230 - 1
r-
P
Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown._ Support
and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal
�. reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where
vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear
distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or
1" (whichever is greater).
Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other
points unless acceptable to the Engineer. Provide lapped splices,
�- unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to
dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.
�,. Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as
required by governing code.
Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work
rprogresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls
and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends.
Use prefabricated "L" and "T" units to provide continuity at
f-- corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by
manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation
requirements of unit masonry.
Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for
temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect,
support, brace and maintain formwork.
Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown.
Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or
concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced
r masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has
hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other
reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during
construction.
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY:
General:
} Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).
Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head
Joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of
unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness
04230 - 2
of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting
courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if
not shown, provide 3/8" joints.
Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed
joints.
Walls:
Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units in 1/2 running bond with vertical
joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below,
unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each course at
corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown, and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels,
bond beams and other special conditions.
Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to
be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions
indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for
vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly
bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.
Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use
special units or modify units to allow for placement of continuous
horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath
or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over
cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units
with solid bottoms.
Grouting:
Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal
directions.
Use "Coarse Grout" for filling '4" spaces or larger in both
horizontal directions.
Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to
the requirements which follow.
Low -Lift Groutin
Provide minimum clear dimension -of 211'and clear area of 8 sq. in.
in vertical cores to be grouted.
Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above
elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing.
Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar
diameters nor 10 feet.
04230 - 3
Lay CMU to maximum pour height. Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if
bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below
bond beam.
Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate
grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt
pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1
1/2" below top course of pour.
Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/21, below bond beam
course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap. at corners
and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before
filling vertical cores above bond beam.
Grout Placing:
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry
units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if
required, before starting grouting operations.
c Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods
r are acceptable to the Engineer.
! Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed. in one working
day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation.
Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less
1 than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given
pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.
Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill
bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities,
during construction of masonry.
When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of
masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for
splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/21, of top course of first pour.
After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place
reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat
sequence if more pours are required.
END OF SECTION 04230
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
04230 - 4
SECTION 05500 —METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron
and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and
castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal
systems specified elsewhere.
Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and as
specified herein:
Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for:
Rough hardware. —
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Loose steel lintels.
Miscellaneous framing and supports.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Steel ladders.
Grab bars are specified in Section 10800.
Swimming pool equipment is specified in Section 13152.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Shop Assembly: Preassemble' items in shop to greatest extent
possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, anchor
details and installation instructions for products used in
miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and
grout.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection
of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations and details of sections and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and
bolt installation by others.
92174 05500 1
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
MATERIALS•
Ferrous Metals:
�. Metal Surfaces. General: For fabrication of .miscellaneous metal
work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are
smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
Steel Plates. Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A
501.
Structural Steel Sheet: Hot -rolled, ASTM A 570; or
cold -rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design
loading.
Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, of grade
required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated,
or if not indicated, G90.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type and grade (if applicable) as
selected by -fabricator and as required for design loading; black
finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule
40), unless otherwise indicated.
Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected by
fabricator.
Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same
type material and finish _as supported rails, unless otherwise
indicated.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous
castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A
27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip
galvanized, ASTM A 153.
Grout•
Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged,
non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE
CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this
section.
92174 05500 - 2
r
Fasteners•
General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade
and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: -Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Lag Bolts: square head type, FS FF-B-561.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type,class and
style as required.
,Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel,,FS FF-W-84.
Paint:
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's
standard,, fast -curing, lead-free, "universal" primer; .-
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for
compatibility to provide a sound "foundation for field -applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P-645.
Galvanizing Repair_ Paint: High zinc dust content paint for
regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with the
Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20.
Concrete Fill:
Concrete Materials and=Properties: Comply with requirements of
Division-3 section "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready -mix
concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500
psi, 440 lbs. cement per cu. ft. minimum and W/C ratio of
0.65 maximum, unless higher strengths indicated.
FABRICATION, GENERAL:
Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or,
if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability
in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions
indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
92174 05500 - 3
7
1
specified for various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible: without causing
grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds
r
smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
is
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth,
r
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed
!
fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-
head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
rProvide
for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with
�.
supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to
provide adequate support for intended use.
7
Cut. reinforce. drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as
indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items.
Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or
specified to be galvanized, as follows:
ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel
shapes, plates, bars and strip 1/8" thick and heavier.
ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.
Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Shop Painting:
Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those
which are galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete
t or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with
t requirements of SSPC-PA1 "paint Application Specification No. 1"
for shop painting.
Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions
of installed metal fabrications:
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B1: SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast
Cleaning".
92174 05500 - 4
Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A):
ROUGH HARDWARE:
SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates,
anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron
shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified
in Division-6 sections.
Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on
wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES:
Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing
on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps
or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill
plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
Galvanize after fabrication.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS:
Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and
recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where
indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of
openings, unless otherwise indicated.'
Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS:
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a
part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles
indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive
adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except
as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel
shapes, plates and steel bars, of welded construction using
mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap
units to receive hardware and similar items.
Equip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into
concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must
be installed after concrete is placed.
Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24" o.c. and
provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/4" x 8" steel
92174 05500 - 5
7
straps.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports.
Galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM:
Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Unless
otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel
shapes, plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints
and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever
possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as
required for coordination of assembly and installation with other
work.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
STEEL LADDERS:
Fabricate steel ladders to design, dimensions, and details
indicated. Provide rungs and stringer members formed of pipe
of sizes and wall thickness indicated, but not less than that
required to support 350 pound loading.
Fabricate ladder with 1" diameter smooth steel rungs welded
to 2 1/2" x 3/8" flat bar stringers. Clip to wall and floor
as detailed.
Galvanize steel ladder components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION•
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation
of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay
job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
r Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to project site.
INSTALLATION•
General:
Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices
92174
r-�
05500 - 6
and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal
fabrications to in -place construction; including threaded
fasteners for: concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,
through -bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as
required.
Cutting. Fitting and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and
fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set work accurately in location, alignment and
elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from
established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing
or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into
concrete masonry or similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight
hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as
exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop
paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior
units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication,
and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual
shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing
surfaces of any bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other
adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge.
of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic
non -shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to
moisture; use non-metallic non -shrink grout in exposed locations,
unless otherwise indicated.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure
that no voids remain.
Steel Ladders:
Secure ladders to wall and floor with steel bracket clips as
indicated. Provide brackets with not less than 6 1/2" clearance
from inside face of rung to finished wall surface. Locate
brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required
for design loading. Secure brackets to building construction as
follows:
92174 05500 - 7
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in
expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or
exposed lag bolt, as applicable.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square
heads.
rFor stud partitions use lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for
accurate location of backing members.
1. ADJUST AND CLEAN•
Vouch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and
paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 2.0 mils.
For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections
and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
F
92174
i
05500 - 8
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.' _..
SUMMARY.
Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for:
Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
Miscellaneous framing and items for site work, temporary --
closures, guards, runways and ladders.
Architectural woodwork is specified in Section 06400.
DEFINITIONS•
Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of —
other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as
otherwise indicated.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all times. Protect
against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels;
provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope
as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
attachment of other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
LUMBER, GENERAL•
Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20
"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading
rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSC) Board of Review.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations
92174 06100 - 1
r
used to reference with lumber grades and species include the
F following:
r RIS - Redwood Inspection Service.
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
r, WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau..
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp
,^ of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule
requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail
dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for
moisture content specified for each use.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide seasoned lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing shipment for sizes 2" or less in
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
DIMENSION LUMBER:
For light framing provide "Stud" or "Standard" grade lumber for
stud framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 6" wide, 10' and shorter) and
"Standard" grade for other light framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to
4" wide), any species.
For structural light framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 4" wide),
provide the following grade and species:
No. 2 grade.
Douglas Fir or Douglas -Fir -Larch graded, respectively, under
NCLIB or WWPA rules.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
is Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including
rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks,
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar
members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes
shown, and as follows:
Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not
specified receive wood preservative treatment.
Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species
or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade
92174 06100 - 2
boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules.
CONSTRUCTION PANELS:
Construction Panel Standards Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product
Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood
panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 'provisions,
with American Plywood Associates (APA) "Performance Standard and
Policies for Structural -Use Panels", Form No. E445.
Trademark: Factory -mark each construction panel with APA
trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
Concealed APA Performance -Rated Panels: Where construction
panels will be used for the following concealed types of
applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with
requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating, _
exposure durability classification, edge detail (where
applicable) and thickness.
Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone
equipments provide -fire -retardant treated plywood panels with
grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in
thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less
than 3/4".
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish
as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards,
complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails,
staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type
recommended by the manufacturer for each use including
recommended nails.
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating
(ASTM A 153).
Building Paper: ASTM D 226, Type`I; asphalt saturated felt, non -
perforated, 15-lb. type.
WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:
PreservativeTreatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as
"Trt-Wd" or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA'Standards C2 (Lumber)
and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each
treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
92174 06100 - 3
I
k Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives
i to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and
plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively of 19 percent
and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following:
Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking,
stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
Wood sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar
concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
Co-iiolete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where
r* possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy
brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with
AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and
discard damaged or defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality
of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work
with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members
plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and
fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
r Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use
finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that
will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections
(' between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;
predrill as required.
WOOD GROUNDS, NAILERS, BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:
Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or
attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as
required for true line and level of work to be attached.
Coordinate location with other work involved.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.
Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete
92174 06100 - 4
placement.
Provide Dermanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key- _
bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness
required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish
material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer
,required.
END OF SECTION 06100 ^
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of architectural woodwork is indicated on
drawings and in schedules.
Types of architectural woodwork include the following:
Interior replacement standing and running trim, moulding and
base for opaque finish.
Architectural cabinets including:
Laminate clad casework including hardware.
Plastic laminate tops.
Finish hardware is specified within Division 8.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
AWI Ouality Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of
"Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" published by the
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI), except as otherwise
indicated.
Installer Oualifications: Arrange for installation of
architectural woodwork by a firm which can demonstrate successful
experience in installing architectural woodwork items similar in
type and quality to those required for this project.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each product
and process specified as work of this section and incorporated
into items of architectural woodwork during fabrication,
finishing, and installation.
Ouality Certification: Submit woodwork Manufacturer's
(Fabricator's) certification, stating that fabricated woodwork
complies with quality grades and other requirements indicated.
r Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing location of each
92174 06400 - 1
t.
item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large scale details,
attachment devices and other components.
Samples: Submit the following samples:
Plastic laminate top with splash, 8" wide x'unit length for
each type of cabinet unit. Provide sample chips for color,
pattern and surface finish.'
Exposed cabinet hardware, one unit of each type and finish.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: -
Protect woodwork during transit, delivery, storage and handling
to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration.
Do not deliver woodwork, until painting, wet work, grinding and
similar operations which could damage, soil or deteriorate
woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due to
unforeseen circumstances, woodwork must be stored in other than
installation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements
specified for installation areas.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Conditioning: Woodwork Manufacturer and Installer shall advise
Contractor of temperature and humidity requirements for woodwork
installation and storage areas. Do not install woodwork until
required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized
and will be maintained in installation areas.
Maintain temperature and humidity in installation area as
required to maintain moisture content of installed woodwork
within a 1.0 percent tolerance of optimum moisture content, from
date of installation through remainder of construction period.
Require Woodwork Manufacturer to establish 'optimum moisture
content and required temperature and humidity condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers 'offering high pressure decorative
laminates which may be incorporated in the work include; but are
not limited to, the following:
Formica Corp.
Nevamar Corp.
Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.
92174 106400 - 2
I'
d.
FFABRICATION, GENERA
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced
quality standard for moisture content of lumber at time of
fabrication and for relative humidity conditions in the
installation areas.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated
with openings and mortises precut, where possible, to receive
hardware and other items and work.
Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application,
and other work before shipment to project site to maximur: extent
possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment
and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide
ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.
Pre -Cut Openings: Fabricate architectural woodwork with pre-cut
openings, where possible, to receive hardware, appliances,
plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate
openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams for
proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cutoffs and, where
located in countertops and similar exposures seal edges of
cutouts with a water-resistant coating.
Measurements: Before proceeding with fabrication of woodwork
required to be fitted to other construction, obtain field
measurements and verify dimensions and shop drawing details as
required for accurate fit.
STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM, AND RAILS:
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 300.
r Rout or groove backs of flat trim members, kerf backs of
other wide flat members, except for members with ends
exposed in finished work.
Interior Trim (Moulding and Basel for Opaque Finish: Comply
with the following requirements:
Grade: Economy.
Lumber Species: Paint grade pine White Pine or Natural
Birch.
ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS, LAMINATE CLAD:
Ouality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division
400B.
Laminate Clad Cabinets: Comply with the following requirements:
92174 06400 - 3
Grade: Custom.
Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
Laminate Cladding: High pressure decorative, laminate
complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows.
Colors, Patterns and Finishes: As selected by Architect
from manufacturer's full range of standard samples (solid
colors, furniture suede finish).
Laminate Grade for Exposed Surfaces: Provide laminate cladding
complying with the following requirements for type of surface and
grade. Provide back-up sheet for all laminate applications.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: GP-50 (0.500" nominal
thickness).
Postformed Surfaces: PF-42 (0.042" nominal thickness).
Vertical Surfaces: GP-30 (0.035" nominal thickness).
Edges: GP-30 (0.035" nominal thickness), matching laminate
in color, pattern and finish.
Semi -Exposed Surfaces: Provide surface material indicated below:
Woodworker's standard low pressure laminate. Standard color
as selected by Architect.
Particleboard: Particleboard shall be 47 pounds per cubic foot
industrial grade and meet or exceed American National Standard
for Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard, ANSI A20B.1, Grade 1-M-2.
Provide dust panels of 1/4" plywood or tempered hardboard above
compartments and drawers except where located directly under
tops.
Back-up Sheets Provide woodworker's standard back-up sheets for
all laminate applications.
ARCHITECTURAL CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS:
General: Provide cabinet' hardware and accessory materials
associated with architectural cabinets, except for items which
are specified in Division-8 section "Finish Hardware".
ARCHITECTURAL CABINET HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
Cabinet Doors: Each door to have
1 Pair Concealed Casework Hinges: Stanley No.1560-2 at end
92174
06400 - 4
r-
mounts. Stanley No.1550-9X.at center mounts.
1 Each Pull: Stanley No.4484 x US26D.
i, Cabinet Drawers: Each door to have
PM 1 Each .Drawer Slide.: K&V No.1429 (Heavy Duty).
1 Each Pull: Stanley No.4484 x US26D.
Drawer Locks: Each drawer where indicated on drawings
1 Each Drawer Locks Olympus No.N078 x US26D x KD
(Furnish two keys per lock - masterkey not required).
ARCHITECTURAL CABINET TOPS:,
Ouality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 and its Division
400C.
Type of Top: High Pressure Decorative Laminate:
Grade• Custom.
Laminate Cladding for Horizontal Surface: High pressure
decorative laminate complying with NEMA LD 3 and as follows:
Colors. Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, as selected from laminate
manufacturer's standard products in the following
categories:
Solid colors, furniture suede finish.
Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal
surface.
FASTENERS AND ANCHORS:
Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required for each
use. Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements.
For metal framing supports, provide screws as recommended by
metal framing manufacturer.
Nails: Select material, type, size and finish required for each
use. Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.
Provide stainless steel or aluminum nab for exposed
exterior woodwork which is to receive transparent finish (if
any). Provide any type of non -corrosive nail for other
exterior woodwork.
92174 06400 - 5
r
i
Anchors: Select material, type, size and finish required by each
substrate for secure anchorage. Provide non-ferrous metal or
hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations
and elsewhere as required for corrosion -resistance. Provide
toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled -in -place
anchors. Furnish inserts and anchors, as required, to be set
into concrete or masonry work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION•
Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in
installation areas prior to installing.
Deliver concrete inserts and similar' anchoring devices to be
built into substrates, well in advance of time substrates are to
be built.
Prior to installation of architectural woodwork, examine shop
fabricated work for completion, and complete work as required,
including back priming and removal of packing.
INSTALLATION•
Install woodwork plumb, level, true and straight with no
distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. Install to
a tolerance of 1/8" in V -0" for plumb and level (including
tops); and with no variations in flushness of adjoining surfaces.
Scribe and cut work to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut
surfaces or repair damaged finish at cuts.
Where woodwork of any type is scribed or fitted against other
surfaces, and job conditions are such, in the opinion of the
Architect, to warrant the installation of a closure type mould,
an appropriate moulding of matching wood shall be installed
entire length or perimeter of the woodwork item.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built-in or directly
attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and
blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing
as required for a complete installation. Except where
prefinished matching fasteners heads are required, use fine
finishing nails for exposing nailing, countersunk and filled
flush with woodwork, and matching final finish where transparent
finish is indicated.
standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints
possible, using full-length pieces (from maximum length of lumber
available) to the greatest extent possible. Stagger joints in
adjacent and related members. Cope at returns, miter at corners
92174 06400 - 6
Fand comply with referenced Quality Standards for joinery.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so that doors and drawers
fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust
hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete the installation of hardware
and accessory items as indicated. Maintain veneer sequence
matching (if any) of cabinets with transparent finish.
Tops: Anchor securely to base units and other support systems as
indicated.
Wood Storage Shelving: Complete the assembly of units and.
install in the areas indicated, including hardware and
accessories as indicated.
ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING AND PROTECTION:
Repair damaged and defective woodwork where possible to eliminate
defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair
replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.
rClean woodwork on exposed and semi -exposed surfaces. Touch-up
shop -applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
Complete the finishing work specified as work of this section, to
whatever extent not completed at shop or prior to installation of
woodwork.
Refer to the Division 9 sections for final finishing of installed
architectural woodwork.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner
acceptable to Fabricator and Installer, which ensures
architectural woodwork being without damage or deterioration at
time of substantial completion.
END OF SECTION 06400
92174 06400 - 7
F
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
-.CART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY:
Extent of caulking and sealants is indicated on the drawings and
shall include the following:
Joint fillers and sealants required for new expansion joints
in new concrete pool deck and adjacent concrete slabs.
The replacement of all existing joint fillers and sealants
in existing expansion joints located within the existing
swimming pool bowl (gutter, walls and floor).
Exterior joint treatment at all door frames, window frames,
masonry control joints and other exterior applications as
required to produce a wind and moisture proof structure.
Interior joint treatment at items and fixtures where
necessary to fill cracks and joints.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCES:
Provide joints sealers that have been produced and installed to
establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product
required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint
sealer application.
Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard
bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full
range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint
sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 inch wide
joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching
the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers
92174 07900 - 1
7
7
or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name
and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time and mixing instructions for multi -component
materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed w:`..th installation of
joint sealers under the following conditions:
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of
joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint
sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS, GENERAL:
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other
related materials that are compatible with one another and with
joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealer indicated or, if
not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
SWIMMING POOL DECK BOWL AND PAVEMENT SEALANTS:
General: Provide sealant which is approved for use with high
traffic concrete surfaces and continuous water immersion.
One -Part Urethane. Self -leveling Sealant: Equal to Sonneborn,
Sonolastic SL 1, complying with the FS TT-S-00230C, Type I Class
A; ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade P, Class'25, Use T, M.
FLASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated
which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those
referenced for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. Colors shall be as
selected by Architect.
92174 07900 - 2
One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS;
Class 50; and complying with the FS` TT-S001543A and FS TT-S-
00230C.
Uses T, NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O.
50 percent°movement in both extension and compression for a
total of 100 percent movement.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
One -Part Nonacid -Curing Silicone Sealant:
"Dow Corning 790"; Dow Corning Corp.
11864"; Pecora Corp.
"Rhodorsil 5C11; Rhone-Poulenc Inc.
"Spectrum 111; Tremco, Inc.
LATEX JOINT SEALANTS:
Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant: Manufacturer's standard, one part,
nonsag, mildew -resistant, acrylic -emulsion sealant complying with
ASTM C 834, formulated to be painted and recommended for exposed
applications on interior and on protected exterior locations —
involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5
percent.
Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
latex joint sealants which may be incorporated in the Work
include the following:
Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant:
"Chem -Calk 600"; Bostik Construction Products Div.
11AC-2011; Pecora Corp.
"Sonolac"; Sonneborn Building Products Div.'; Rexnord Chem.
Prod., Inc.
"Tremco Acrylic Latex 834"; Tremco Inc.
JOINT SEALANT BACKING:
General: Provide sealant backings of material and type which are
nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants,
primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for
applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field
experience and laboratory testing.
Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible, nongassing plastic
92174 07900 - 3
r�4 foam of material indicated below; nonabsorbent to water and gas;
and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and
otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
Either open cell polyurethane foam or closed -cell
polyethylene foam, unless otherwise indicated, subject to
approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold -applied sealants
only.
Elastomeric Tubing Joint -Fillers: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or
7 silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water
and gas, capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to
-26 deg F (-15 deg C). Provide products with low compression set
r and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant
performance.
r' Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from
adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint
r surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in
sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
r., MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Primer: Provide type recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates
indicated, as determined from pre -construction joint sealer -
substrate tests and field tests.
7 Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Provide nonstaining, chemical
cleaners of type which are acceptable to manufacturers of
` sealants and sealant backing materials, which are not harmful to
substrates and adjacent nonporous materials, and which do not
leave oily residues or otherwise have a detrimental effect on
sealant adhesion or in-service performance.
Masking Tape: Provide nonstaining, nonabsorbent type compatible
with joint sealants and to surfaces adjacent to joints.
1 PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXAMINATION•
Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealers, with Installer
present for compliance with requirements for joint
configurations, installation tolerances and other conditions
affecting joint sealer performance. Do not proceed with
installation of joint sealers until unsatisfactory conditions
have been corrected.
92174 07900 - 4
PREPARATION
Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint
sealer manufacturers and the following requirements:
Remove all foreign material from joint substrates which
could interfere with adhesion of joint sealer, including
dust; paints, except for permanent, protective coatings
tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility
by sealant manufacturer; old joint sealers; oil; grease;
waterproofing; water repellents; water; surface dirt and
frost.
Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile
and similar porous joint substrate surfaces, by brushing,
grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound
substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint
sealers. Remove loose particles remaining from above
cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with
oil -free compressed air.
Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of
ceramic tile and other nonporous surfaces by chemical
cleaners or other means which are not harmful to substrates
or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of
joint sealers.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where
recommended by joint sealer manufacturer based on preconstruction
joint sealer -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer
to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations.
Confine primers to areas of joint sealer bond, do not allow
spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact
of sealant with adjoining surfaces which otherwise would be
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning
methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALERS:
General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed
installation instructions applicable to products and applications
indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with
recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of joint sealants as
92174 07900 - 5
r" applicable to -materials, applications and conditions indicated.
i
Latex Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with requirements of
ASTM C 790 for use of latex sealants.
Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to
comply with the following requirements:
Install Joint -fillers of type indicated to provide support of
sealants during application and at position required to produce
the cross -sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement
capability,
Do not leave gaps between ends of joint -fillers.
Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.
Remove absorbent joint -fillers which have become wet prior
to sealant application and replace with dry material.
Install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint fillers,
compression seals or back of joints where adhesion of sealant to
surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
Install compressible seals serving as sealant backings to comply
with requirements indicated above for joint fillers.
Installation of sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques
that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting
r� joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each
17 joint configuration and providing uniform, cross -sectional shapes
and depths relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant
movement capability.
Tooling of Nonsaq Sealants: Immediately after sealant
application and prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool
sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration
indicated, to eliminate air pockets and to ensure contact and
adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants
from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents which
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by
sealant manufacturer.
Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 6A in ASTM C
i 962, unless otherwise indicated.
CLEANING•
Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as
work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved
by manufacturers of joint sealers and of products in which joints
92174 07900 - 6
occur.
ROTECTION:
Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact
with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from
construction operations or other causes so that they are without
deterioration or damage at time of substantial completion. If
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealers immediately and reseal joints with new
materials to produce joint sealer installations with repaired
areas indistinguishable from original work.
END OF SECTION 07900
92174 07900 - 7
r"
i
t"
I SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of standard steel doors, tubular steel gates and frames is
indicated and scheduled on drawings.
Finish hardware is specified elsewhere in Division 8.
Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry
construction is specified in Division 4.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute
"Recommended Specifications: Standard Steel Doors and Frames"
(SDI-100) and as herein specified.
j Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire -rated door assemblies are
indicated or required, provide fire -rated door and frame
�., assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 "Standard for Fire Doors and
Windows", and have been tested, listed, and labeled in accordance
with ASTM E 152 "Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door
Assemblies" by a nationally recognized independent testing and
inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
BMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data
substantiating that products comply with requirements.
Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and installation of steel
doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations
of door design types, conditions. at openings, details of
construction, location and installation requirements of finish
hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference
numbers for details and openings as those on
contract drawings.
Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass
92174 08110 - 1
and glazing requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
Deliver hollow metal work cartoned or crated to provide
protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional
sealed plastic wrapping for factory finished doors.
Inspect hollow metal work upon delivery for damage. Minor damages
may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all
respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise,
remove and replace damaged items as directed.
Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place
units on minimum 4" high wood blocking. Avoid use of non -vented
plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber.
If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton
immediately. Provide 1/4" spaces between stacked doors to
promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering steel doors and frames which
may be incorporated in the work include; but are not limited to,
the following:
Steel Doors and Frames, (General
Allied Steel Product, Inc.
Amweld/Div. American Welding & Mfg. Co.
Ceco Corp.
Copco Door Co.
Kewanee Corp.
Steelcraft/Div. American Standard Co.
Trussbilt, Inc.
Republic Builders Products Corp./Subs. Republic Steel.
MATERIALS•
Hot -Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon
steel, pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A
568.
Cold -Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel,
complying with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.
Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc -coated carbon steel sheets of
commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 526, with ASTM A 525,
G60 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.
92174 08110 - 2
r+
Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18- gage
l; galvanized sheet steel.
Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units,
except hot -dip galvanized items to be built into exterior walls,
complying with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
Shop Applied Paint:
Primer: Rust -inhibitive enamel or paint, either air -drying or
baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints.
FABRICATION GENERAL:
Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in
appearance and free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever
practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant.
Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory -
assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at project
site. Comply with SDI-100 requirements as follows:
Exterior and Interior Doors: SDI-100, Grade III, extra
heavy-duty, Model 2, minimum 16-gage faces.
Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and
rails of nonflush units, from only cold -rolled steel.
Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge
channels, louvers and moldings from either cold -rolled or hot -
rolled steel (at fabricator's option).
Fabricate exterior and interior doors, panels, and frames from
galvanized sheet steel. Close top and bottom edges of exterior
doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of
minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels.
Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide
countersunk flat Phillips heads for exposed screws and bolts.
Finish Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to
receive mortised and concealed finish hardware in accordance with
final Finish Hardware Schedule and templated provided by hardware
supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115
series specifications for door and frame preparation for
hardware.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface -applied hardware.
Drilling and tapping for surface -applied finish hardware may be
done at project site.
Locate finish hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if
not indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for
92174 08110 - 3
r-
1
Builder's Hardware,", published by Door and Hardware Institute.
Shop Painting:
Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame
units, including.galvanized surfaces.
Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and
other foreign materials before application of paint.
Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a
uniformly .finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
Apply finish coat to doors indicated as prefinished by
electrostatically spraying and baking, to produce a paint
thickness of 1.25 mils.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS:
Provide standard steel doors of types and styles indicated on _
drawings or schedules.
TUBULAR STEEL DOORS AND GATES:
Provide tubular steel doors and gates of types and styles
indicated on drawings or schedules.
Fabricate tubular steel doors and gates from 1,1/2" x 1 1/2" x 16
gauge galvanized steel. Miter or close top, bottom and side
edges to form a continuous frame with out holes or openings.
Grid smooth all edges and corners.
STANDARD STEEL FRAMES:
Provide metal frames for doors, transoms, 'sidelights, borrowed
lights, and other openings, of types and styles as shown on
drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate exterior and interior frames of minimum
14-gage cold -rolled furniture steel.
Fabricate frames with mitered and welded corners.
Form exterior and interior frames of hot dip galvanized
steel..
Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to
receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single -swing frames and 2
silencers on heads of double -swing frames.
Plaster Guards: Provide 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar
boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where —
mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and
92174 1 1 08110 - 4
to close off interior of ,openings.
RT 3 - EXECUTION
General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories
in accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and
as herein specified.
Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended
Erection Instructions for Steel Frames", unless otherwise
indicated.
Except for frames located at in -place concrete or masonry
and at drywall installations, place frames prior to
construction at enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames
accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced
securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall
construction is completed, remove temporary braces and
spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
In masonry construction, locate 3 wall anchors per jamb at
hinge and strike levels.
At in -place concrete or masonry construction, set frames and
secure to adjacent construction with machine screws and
masonry anchorage devices.
Install fire -rated frames in accordance with NFPA Std. No.
80.
In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors
per jamb at hinge and strike levels. In open steel stud
partitions, place studs in wall anchor notches and wire tie.
In closed steel stud partitions, attach wall anchors to
studs with tapping screws.
Door Installation:
Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances
specified in SDI-100.
Place fire -rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA
Standard No. 80.
ADJUST AND CLEAN•
Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any
rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of
compatible air -drying primer.
92174 08110 - 5
r-�
Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection,
remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware
items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete
and proper operating condition.
END OF SECTION 08110
92174 108110 - 6
y
r
1 SECTION 08710 - FINISH HARDWARE
a
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: "Builders Hardware" includes: items known
commercially as builders hardware which are required for swing,
sliding and folding doors, except special types of unique and
non -matching hardware specified in the same section as the door
and door frame.
Extent of finish hardware required is indicated on drawings and
in schedules.
Cabinet hardware is specified under Architectural Woodwork.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets,
hinges, closers, etc.) from only one manufacturer,
although several may be indicated as offering products complying
with requirements.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturers technical product data for
each item of hardware in accordance with Division-1 section
p "Submittals". Include whatever information may be necessary to
show compliance with requirements, and include instructions for
installation and for maintenance of operating parts and finish.
a
Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule in manner
indicated below. Coordinate hardware withh doors, frames
.. and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function
i and finish of hardware.
Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware
indicated, organize hardware schedule into "hardware sets"
indicating complete designations of every item required for
each door or opening. Include the following information:
" Type, style, function, size and finish of each
` hardware item.
Name and manufacturer of each item.
92174 08710 - 1
f
4
Fastenings and other pertinent information.
Location of hardware set cross-referenced to
indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door
and frame schedule.
Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, codes, etc.
contained in schedule.
Mounting locations for hardware.
Door and frame sizes and materials.
Keying information.
samples: Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and
prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample of
each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required, and
tagged with -full description for coordination with schedule.
Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units which are
acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review
and field comparison procedures may, after final check of
operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying
coordination requirements.
Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of --
doors, frames and other work to be factory -prepared for the
installation of hardware. Upon request, check shop drawings of
such other work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for _
proper location and installation of hardware.
Special operating Requirements: Door hardware; thresholds, door
closers as door opening force for each door shall comply with all
requirements established by the Americans with Disabilities Act
(ADA) and Section 7, Article 601b, Veron's Texas Civil Statues,
with regard to accessibility to the handicapped.
The force required to properly activate all exterior doors shall
not exceed 8.5 lbf. The force required to properly activate all
interior doors shall not exceed 5 lbf.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Tag each item or package separately, with identification related
to final hardware schedule, and include basic installation
.instructions with each item or package.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS AND FABRICATION:
General:
92174 08710 - 2
r
� I
Hand of door:
Drawings show
direction of slide, swing or hand of
`
each door
leaf. Furnish
each item of hardware for proper
installation
and operation of door movement as shown.
Manufacturer's
Name Plate:
Do not use manufacturer's products
which have
manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a
r'
visible location
(omit
removable nameplates), except in
conjunction
with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable
to Architect.
Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of
lock cylinders only.
Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and
forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal
alloy, composition, temper and hardness, but in no case of lesser
(commercially recognized) quality than specified for the
applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI A156 series
standard for each type hardware item and with ANSI A156.18 for
finish designations indicated. Do not furnish "optional"
materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as
( otherwise specified.
Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published
templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do
not provide hardware which has been prepared for self -tapping
sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated.
Furnish screws for installation, with each hardware item.
Provide Phillips flat -head screws except as otherwise indicated.
Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match
hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work, to
match finish of such other work as closely as possible,
including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted
finish.
r Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units which are exposed
when door is closed, except to extent no standard units
of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do
not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on the
opposite face is exposed in other work, except where it is not
feasible to adequately reinforce the work. In such cases,
provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
LOCK CXLINDERS AND KEYING:
General: Supplier will meet with Owner to finalize keying
requirements and obtain final instructions in writing.
Masterkey System: Except as otherwise indicated, key to City of
Lubbock Parks and Recreation Department existing masterkey
system.
92174
08710 - 3
Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze,
stainless steel or nickel silver.
Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as
otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock
which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related
locks.
Permanently inscribe each key with number or lock that
identifies cylinder manufacturer key symbol, and notation
"DO NOT DUPLICATE".
Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
Key Ouantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock and 5 master
keys for each master system.
Deliver keys to Owner's representative.
HARDWARE FINISHES:
Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or
opening, to the greatest extent possible, and except as otherwise
indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as
commercially possible where the base metal or metal
forming process is different for individual units of hardware
exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match items to
the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set (or
push-pull units if no latch -lock sets) for color and texture.
Provide finishes which match thoseestablished by BHMA or, if
none established, match the Architect's sample.
Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or
coating (if any), composition, hardness and other qualities
complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than
specified for the applicable units of hardware by referenced
standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION•
Mount hardware units at heights indicated in "Recommended
Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel` Doors and
Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute, except as
specifically indicated or required to comply with governing
regulations, and except as may be otherwise directed by
Architect.
Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's
instructions and recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting
92174 08710 - 4
L
is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces which are
later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate
removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface
r' protections with finishing work specified in the Division-9
d sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes
have been completed on the substrate.
Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and
reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper
installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units which are not factory -prepared for
anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance
with industry standards.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each
door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.
Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and
r� smoothly as intended for the application made.
Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more
than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space or
area, return to the work during the week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of all hardware
items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary
to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of
heating and ventilating equipment.
SCHEDULED HARDWARE:
General Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size
and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware
is indicated in Finish Hardware Schedules below. All locksets,
latchsets, privacy sets and dummy trim shall be furnished with
lever type handles to accommodate the physically handicapped.
Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of
the following.
92174
Butts and Hinges: Hager and Triple S Steel Supply
Locks & Lock Trim: Corbin
Stops: BBW and Ives
Miscellaneous: Triple S Steel Supply
08710 - 5
FINISH HARDWARE SCHEDULE:
HW HEADING #1
Tubular Steel Gates Mk. #1 and #2
each gate to have
1 pr
Spring hinges HI-1250 x 3.5 x 3.5 x USP
SSS
1 ea
Deadlock 622 x US26D - BST
Corbin
1 ea
Weldable Steel Lock Box (verify size)
SSS
HW HEADING
#2
Drs. Mk. #3
and #4
each door to have
1 ea
Hinge BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x USP
Hager -
1 pr
Spring hinges 1250 4.5 x 4.5 x USP
Hager
1 ea
Privacy Set 77-820 x US26D
Corbin
1 ea
Deadlock 623 x US26D - BST
Corbin
1 ea
Wall stop WC12T x US32D
BBW
3 ea
Silencers
BBW
HW HEADING
#3
'-
Dr. Mk. #5
each dutch
door to have
_
1 pr
Hinges BB1279 4.5 x 4.5 x USP
Hager
1 pr
Spring hinges 1250 4.5 x 4.5 x USP
Hager
1 ea
Lockset 77-851 x US26D - BST
Corbin
1 ea
Deadlock 623 x US26D -`BST
Corbin
1 ea
Dutch Door Bolt 054B26D
Ives
1 ea
Door stop and holder 445B26D
Ives --
NOTE: Masterkey to existing City of Lubbock Parks and
Recreation Department masterkey system.
End of Hardware Schedule
END OF SECTION 08710
92174 08710 - 6
r
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
M 9• 1u
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of painting work is indicated on drawings and schedules,
and as herein specified.
Work includes the following:
The preparation and repainting of all exterior fascia
members, trim, soffits, porch ceilings, steel columns,
doors, door frames, window frames, and metal screens.
i
The preparation and repainting of all previously painted
r+ exterior concrete wall surfaces and concrete masonry unit
r walls and fences.
POO The, preparation and repainting of all swimming pool
surfaces, including gutter and pool border. Sandblasting of
pool surface shall not be required.
The preparation and repainting of all interior fascia,
ceilings, mouldings, trim, screens, steel columns, metal
partitions, doors, frames, window frames and previously
,.o painted tile and masonry wall surfaces.
The preparation and painting of all items of new
construction, including exposed concrete masonry units in
new toilet facilities.
Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified
are in addition to shop -priming and surface treatment
specified under other sections of work.
r- Painting of Mechanical and Electrical items shall be included
under this section. Work includes field painting of exposed
bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and
of hangers, 'exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal
t surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical and electrical
work, except as otherwise indicated. See Division 15 and
Division 16 for specific painting requirements.
92174
r
u
09900 - 1
"Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials,
including primers, emulsions, enamels, -stains, sealers and
fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime,
intermediate or finish coats.
Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material
is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted, paint
exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in
"schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically
mentioned, paint the same gas similar adjacent materials or
areas. If color or finish is not designated,Architect will
select these from standard colors or finishes available.
Following categories of work are not included as part of
field -applied finish work.
Pre -Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not
include painting when factory -finishing or
installer -finishing is specified for such items as (but
not limited to) metal toilet enclosures, prefinished
partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural
woodwork and casework, and finished mechanical and
electrical equipment, including light fixtures, switchgear
and distribution cabinets.
Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting
is not required on surfaces such as walls or
ceilings in concealed areas and generally' inaccessible
areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, and pipe spaces.
Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal
surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium
plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will
not require finish painting.
Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts
of operating units, mechanical' and electrical parts,
such as valve and damper operators, linkages,
sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not
require finish painting.
Following -categories of work are included under other sections of
these specifications.
Shop Primers: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of
ferrous metal items is included under various sections for
structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and
similar items.,
Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated
components such as architectural woodwork, wood casework and
shop -fabricated or factory -built mechanical and electrical
92174 09900 - 2
r
f equipment or accessories is included under other sections of
these specifications.
r' Do not paint over any code -required labels, such as Underwriters'
Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification,
performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other
undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats.
Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use
only within recommended limits.
Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these
specifications in which prime paints are to be provided.to ensure
compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates.
Upon request from other trades, furnish information or
characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure
compatible prime coats are used.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information
including Paint label analysis and application instructions for
each material proposed for use.
Samples: Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color
chips for surfaces to be painted. Use representative colors when
preparing samples for review. Submit samples for Architect's
review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material
and application for each coat of each finish sample.
�.,. On 12" x 1211 hardboard, provide two samples of each color
and material, with texture to simulate actual
conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Architect
until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.
On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and
interior building components, duplicate painted finishes of
prepared samples. Provide full -coat finish samples on at
least 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required
sheen, color and texture is. obtained; simulate finished
lighting conditions for review of in -place work.
Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the
job.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE:
Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened
packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,
92174 09900 - 3
r
and following information:
Name or title of material.
Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
Manufacturer's stock number and date
Manufacturer's name.
Contents by volume, for major
constituents.
Thinning instructions.
Application instructions.
Color name and number.
of manufacture.
pigment and vehicle
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area
neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas
are adequately protected from fire hazards and health
hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of
paints.
JOB CONDITIONS•
Apply water -base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be
painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50OF (100C)
and 90OF (320C), unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Apply solvent -thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to
be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 450F
(70C) and 950F (350C), unless otherwise permitted by paint
manufacturer's printed instructions.
Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when relative
humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless
otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas
and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within
temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during
application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be
incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
92174 09900 - 4
i
j Coronado Paint Company (CP)
Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe).
Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corporation
(Glidden).
Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
Kelly -Moore Paint Co. (K-M)
�. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh).
Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
The Sherwin-Williams Company (S-W).
Technical Coatings, Inc. (TCI).
MATERIALS•
r- Material Ouality: Provide best quality grade of various types of
coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials
manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's
�. identification as a standard, best -grade product will not be
acceptable.
Proprietary names used to designate color or materials
are not intended to imply that products of named
manufacturers are required to exclusion of equivalent
products of other manufacturers.
Federal Specifications establish minimum acceptable
quality for paint materials. Provide written certification
from paint manufacturer that materials provided meet or
exceed these minimums.
Manufacturer's products which comply with coating
qualitative requirements of applicable Federal
Specifications, yet differ in quantitative requirements,
may be considered for use when acceptable to Architect.
Furnish material data and manufacturer's certificate of
performance to Architect for any proposed substitutions.
Color Pigments: Pure, non -fading, applicable types to suit
substrates and service indicated.
Lead content in pigment, if any, is limited to contain not
�•- more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal based on the total non-
volatile (dry -film) of paint by weight.
This limitation is extended to interior surfaces and those
exterior surfaces, such as stairs, decks, porches,railings,
windows, and doors which are readily accessible to children
under seven years of age.
r
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION•
92174
09900 - 5
r
Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting
work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of
work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions
have been correct in a manner acceptable to Applicator.
Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a
durable paint film.
SURFACE PREPARATION:
General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in
accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein
specified, for each particular substrate condition.
Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove
and reprime as required. Notify Architect in writing of any
anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems
with substrates primed by others.
Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces,
plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and
not to be finish -painted, or provide surface -applied
protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of
painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or
surface treatments. Remove oil and grease prior to
mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that
contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet,
newly -painted surfaces.
Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of
concrete, concrete block,- cement plaster and
cement -asbestos board to be painted by removing efflorescence,
chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to
remove glaze.
Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be
painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are
found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and
burning of finish paint, correct this condition before
application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where
moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's
printed directions.
92174 1 09900 - 6
Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a
commercial solution or muriatic acid, or other
etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize
acid, and allow to dry before painting.
Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil, or other
foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper,
as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to
view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots
and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot
sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill
holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood-t.11er. Sandpaper smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job -painted
immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces,
undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets,
r counters, cases, paneling.
When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for
backpriming.
Backprime paneling on interior partitions only where
masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction occurs on
backside.
Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with
a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately
upon delivery to job.
Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized
or shop -coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other
foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
Touch-up shop -applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare,
where required by other sections of these
specifications. Clean and touch-up with same type shop
primer.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants
with non -petroleum based solvent.
MATERIALS PREPARATION:
Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with
manufacturer's directions
Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a
clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir
92174 09900 - 7
surface film into material. Remove film and, if
necessary, strain material before using..
APPLICATION•
General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's
directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for
substrate and type of material being applied.
Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, are
indicated in "schedules" of the contract documents.
Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints
used.
Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other
conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint
film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give _
special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges,
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a
dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same -'
as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind
permanently- fixed equipment or ,furniture with prime coat
only before final installation of equipment.
Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through
registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.
Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged
covers to match exposed surfaces.
Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same
as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
Sand lightly between each succeeding.enamel or varnish coat.
Omit first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been
shop -primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise
indicated.
Scheduling Painting: Apply first -coat material to surfaces that
have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting
as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit
proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to
where it feels firms, does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate.thumb pressure, and application of another coat of
paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the
undercoat.
Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than
92174 09900 - 8
r"
1
7 manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total
dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as
recommended by coating manufacturer.
Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to
be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by
r others.
Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of
suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a
finish coat with no burn -through or other defects due to
insufficient sealing.
,9tipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even
and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps,
irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface
imperfections.
Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an
opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and
coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be
acceptable.
Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and
coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance
with specified requirements.
CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION:
Clean -Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded
paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work day.
Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other
paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper
methods of washing and scraping, using car not to scratch or
otherwise damage finished surfaces.
Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted
or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Correct
r any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting,
as acceptable to Architect.
Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect
p newly -painted finishes. Remove temporary protective
wrappings provided by others for protection of their work,
after completion of painting operations.
At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and
restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
92174
r
r
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:
General: Provide the following Paint systems for the various
substrates, as indicated.
Concrete Swimming Pool Surfaces:
Lusterless (Flat) Chlorinated Rubber Coating System: Recoat
finish system including cleaning, etching, priming and 2
finish coats.
Cleaning Solution: As recommended by paint mfgr.
Etching Solution: As recommended by paint mfgr.
Prime Coat: Chlorinated Rubber Primer (FS TT-P-95)
First and Second Finish Coats: Chlorinated Rubber
Coating (FS TT-P-95, Type I, Class I).
Concrete, Stucco and Masonry:
Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 Finish coats with total
dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
First and Second Finish Coats: Exterior Acrylic
Emulsion (FS TT-P-19).
Concrete Masonry Units:
Lusterless (Flat) Acrylic Finish: 2 Finish coats over block
filler with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Block Filler: High Performance Latex Block Filler.
First and Second Finish Coats: Exterior Acrylic
Emulsion (FS TT-P-19).
General Painted Wood And Hardboard:
Low Luster Finish: 2 Finish coats over primer.
Prime Coat: Exterior Primer Coating (FS TT-P-25).
First and Second Finish Coats: Exterior Acrylic
Emulsion (FS TT-P-19).
Ferrous Metal:
Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer.
Primer is not required on items delivered shop primed.
Priire Coat: Synthetic Rust -Inhibiting Primer
(FS TT-P-664).
First and Second Finish Coats: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel
(FS TT-E-527).
92174 09900 - 10
r
Zinc -Coated Metal:
f
Lusterless Alkyd Enamel: 2 Finish coats over primer.
Prime Coat: Zinc Dust -Zinc Oxide Primer (FS TT-P-641).
First and Second Finish Coats: Lusterless Alkyd Enamel
(FS TT-E-527).
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE:
General: Provide the following paint systems for the various
substrates, as indicated.
Concrete Masonry Units and Glazed Tile Units:
Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over filled surface
with total dry film thickness not less than 3.5 mils,
excluding filler coat.
Block Filler: High -Performance Latex Block Filler.
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543).
Finish Coat: Interior Semi -Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
(FS TT-E-509).
Ferrous Metal:
Semi -Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 Coats over primer with total
dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Prime Coat: Synthetic Rust -Inhibiting Primer
(FS TT-P-664). Prime coat is not required on items
delivered shop primed.
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543).
Finish Coat: Interior Semi -Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
(FS TT-E-509).
Zinc -Coated Metal:
Semi -Gloss Finish: 2 Coats over primer with total dry film
thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
Prime Coat: Zinc -Dust - Zinc Oxide Primer Coating (FS
TT-P-641).
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543).'
Finish Coat: Interior Semi -Gloss Odorless Alkyd Enamel
(FS TT-P-509).
92174 09900 - 11
r
Painted Woodwork and Hardboard:
Semi -Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 Coats.
Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat (FS TT-E-543).
First and Second Coats: Interior Semi -Gloss Odorless
Alkyd Enamel (FS TT-E-509).
Cotton or Canvas Covering over Insulation:
Flat Latex Emulsion "Size": 2 Coats.
First and Second Coats: Latex -Based Interior Flat
Paint (FS TT-P-29). Add fungicidal agent to render —
fabric mildew proof.
END OF SECTION 09900 —
92174 09900 - 12
r
SECTION 10800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of toilet accessory is indicated on drawings
and schedules hereinafter.
Mirrors are specified in this Section.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish. inserts and anchoring devices
which must be set in concrete or built into masonry,; coordinate
delivery with other work to avoid delay.
Accessory Locations: Coordinate accessory locations with other
work to avoid interference and to assure proper operation and
servicing of accessory units.
Products: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of
accessory unit and for units exposed in same areas, unless
otherwise acceptable to Architect.
SUBMITTALS•
ProductData: Submit manufacturer's technical data and
installation instructions for each toilet accessory.
Samples: Submit full-size samples of units to Architect for
review of design and operation. Acceptable samples will be
returned and may be used in the work.
r Setting Drawings: Provide setting drawings, templates,
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorage
devices and cut-out requirements in other work.
i! PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with
requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories which may
r. be incorporated in the work include the following:
92174 10800 - 1
Bobrick Washroom Equip., Inc.
Bradley Corporation.
Franklin Brass Mfg. Co.
McKinney/Subsidiary Kidde, Inc.
Parker-Scovill.
MATERIALS, GENERAL:
Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish,
22 gage (.03411) minimum, unless otherwise indicated.
Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, FS QQ-B-613 Rods,
shapes, forgings, and flat products with finished edges, FS
QQ-B-626. --
Sheet Steel: Cold rolled,.commercial quality ASTM A 366, 20-gage
(.04011) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. Surface
preparation and metal pretreatment as required for applied
finish.
Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base
metal, ASTM B 456, Type SC 2.
Baked Enamel Finish: Factory -applied, gloss white, baked acrylic
enamel coating.
Mirror Glass: Laminated Safety Glass or polished stainless
steel.
Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 386, hot -dip
galvanized after fabrication.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as
accessory unit or of galvanized steel where concealed.
PRODUCTS:
General: Proprietary references are given only to serve as a
guide line f or establishing type, style and quality of
accessories required for this project. Other accessories will be
considered, provided same are, in the opinion of the Architect,
equal in weight, finish, size, appearance and dispense same type _
of goods or services.
ADA Compliance: All toilet accessories shall comply with all
provisions of.the current Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Accessibility Guidelines for Building and Facilities.
92174 10800 - 2
r
r
f
6 +
TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE:
WOMENS HANDICAP TOILET NO.105:
4 - Grab Bars: Bobrick B-6206IX48 Horizontal.
1 - Grab Bar: Bobrick B-6206X36 Horizontal.
1 - Grab Bar: Bobrick B-6256/46 (24Hx32V) 90 Degree Angle -
Verify Hand.
1 - Tilting Mirror: Bobrick B-294 (16"WX3011H).
1 - Surface -Mounted Multi -Roll Toilet Paper Dispenser: Bobrick
B-288.
1 Soap Dispenser: Bobrick B-2111.
1 - Paper Towel Dispenser: Bobrick B-263.
1 - Waste Receptacle: By Owner.
MENS HANDICAP TOILET NO.106:
WOMENS DRESSING ROOM NO.101:
Same as Mens Toilet No.105.
1 - Frameless Stainless Steel Mirror: Bobrick B-1556 4824
(4811HX2411W) furnish with tamper proof screws.
Note: Contractor shall reinstall existing toilet accessories in
existing locations.
{ENS DRESSING ROOM NO.108:
1 - Frameless Stainless Steel Mirror: Bobrick B-1556 4824
(4811HX2411W) furnish with tamper proof screws.
Note: Contractor shall reinstall existing toilet accessories in
existing locations.
End of Toilet Accessories Schedule.
FABRICATION•
General: No names or labels are permitted on exposed faces of
toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not
exposed to view or back surface, provide identification of each
accessory item by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped
nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product model
number.
rSurface -Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where
otherwise indicated, fabricate units with tight seams and joints,
exposed edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with
r' continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Provide concealed
anchorage wherever possible.
r-• Recessed Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units of all welded construction, without
92174 10800 - 3
r
mitered corners. Hang doors or access panels with .full-length
stainless steel piano hinge. Provide anchorage which is fully
concealed when unit is closed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION•
Install toilet accessory units in accordance with manufacturers'
instructions, using fasteners which are appropriate to substrate
and recommended by manufacturer of unit. Install units plumb and
level, firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated, and
if not indicated, as directed by the Owner or Architect. All
mounting heights shall comply with current ADA guidelines.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that
mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective
items.
Clean and polish all exposed surfaces after removing protective
coatings.
END OF SECTION 10800
92174 10800 - 4
r
t
i
SECTION 10420 - SPECIALTY SIGNS
d:.
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
r The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION U WORK:
Extent of specialty signs shall be as specified herein.
orms g-f- specialty signs required include the following:
Engraved laminated plastic identification plates:
Contractor shall furnish and install fourteen (14)
identification plates. Engraving (including standard
handicap logos) shall be in accordance with a schedule to be
furnished by the Architect.
OUALITY ASSURANCE:
r Uniformity ot Manufacturer: For each sign form and graphic image
k process indicated, furnish products of a single manufacturer.
ADA and EAB Standards: All applicable signs and interior
identification plates shall comply with all current ADA and EAB
Standards and requirements. All signs shall be furnished with
Braille or other tactile graphics recommended for use by the
physically handicapped.
SUBMITTALS:
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection
of specialty signs. Include plans, elevations and large scale
details of sign wording and lettering layout. Show anchorages
and accessory items. Furnish location template drawings for
items supported or anchored to permanent construction.
Product Date: Submit manufacturer's technical. data and
installation instructions for each type of sign required.
Samples: Submit samples of each sign form and material showing
finishes, colors, surface textures and qualities of manufacture
and design of each sign component, including graphics.
Submit full-size sample units, if requested by the Architect.
Acceptable units may be installed as part of the work.
r
92174
i
10420 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
MATERIALS:
Plastic Laminate: Provide high pressure plastic laminate
engraving stock with face and core plies in contrasting colors,
in finishes and color combinations indicated or, if not
indicated, as selected from the manufacturer's standard.
Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, use concealed fasteners
fabricated from metals that are non -corrosive to either the sign
material or the mounting surface.
FABRICATION•
Engraved Identification Plates: Fabrication of engraved
identification plates shall be single faced type, equal to,
Nelson -Harkins, Style TS450, with edges mechanically and smoothly
finished to conform with the following requirements:
Size• 4" x 13"
Color: As selected by Architect, from manufacturer's
standards.
Edge Color for_Plastic Laminate: Provide edge color same
as.the background.
Corner Condition: Provide corners with 1/2" radius.
Letter Size, Type, and Text: 1" high letters, type as
selected by Architect.
ADA and EAB Compliance: All signs shall be furnished with
tactile imaging as required to meet current ADA and EAB
Standards.
Mounting Locations and Heights: All Identification Plates
shall be located alongside the doors on the latch side and
shall be mounted at a height between 54 inches and 66 inches
above the finish floor. Exact locations shall be as
directed by Architect. '
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION•
General: Locate sign units and, accessories where shown or
scheduled, using mounting methods of type described and in
compliance with the manufacturer's instructions.
92174 10420 - 2
Install sign units level, plumb and at the heights
indicated, and if not indicated, as directed by Architect,
with sign surfaces free from distortion or other defects in
of appearance.
Wall -Mounted Signs: Attach sign units to wall surfaces using
the methods indicated below:
Glue or Appropriate Finish Screws: Use methods approved by
sign manufacturer for project wall surfaces. Do not use
glues which will deteriorate either the wall finish material
or the sign material itself.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION:
At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surface in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units
from damage until acceptance by the Owner.
END OF SECTION 10420
92174
10420 - 3
SECTION 13130 - METAL BUILDING COMPONENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections,
apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of the metal building components is shown on the
drawings.
The types of metal building components for the project include the
following:
Roof Panels and Accessories
"Cee" Purlins
"Zee" Purlins
RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
Reinforced Unit Masonry - Section 04230
QUALITY ASSURANCE•
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
Light Gage Steel: Comply with the American Iron and Steel
Institute's (AISI) "Specification for the Design of Cold Formed
Steel Structural Members" and Design of Light Gage Steel
Diaphragms" for design requirements and allowable stresses.
Welded Connections: Comply with the American Welding Society's
(AWS) "Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building
Construction" for welding Procedures.
SUBMITTALS:
General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
Product data consisting of metal building system manufacturer's
product information for building components and accessories.
Shop drawings for metal building system components and accessories
that are not fully detailed or dimensioned in manufacturer's
product data. '-
13130 - 1
7,
Building Accessory Components: Provide details of metal building
accessory components to clearly indicate methods of installation.
Single -Source Responsibility: Obtain the metal building system
components, including structural framing and roof covering, and
accessory components, from one source from a single manufacturer
unless otherwise specified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver prefabricated components, sheets, panels, and other
manufactured items so they will not be damaged or deformed.
Package roof panels for protection against transportation damage.
Handling: Exercise care in unloading,.storing, and erecting wall
and roof covering panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and
surface damage.
Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or
other suitable weathertight ventilated covering. Store metal wall
and roof panels so that water accumulations will drain freely. Do
not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause
staining, denting or other surface damage.
WARRANTY:
Roofing Panel Finish Warranty: Furnish the roofing panel
manufacturer's written warranty, covering failure of the
factory -applied exterior finish on metal roof panels within the
warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and not a
limitation of other rights the Owner may have against the
Contractor under the Contract Documents.
Warranty period for factory -applied exterior finishes on roof
panels is 20 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MANUFACTURERS:
Manufacturers: Shall be subject to compliance with requirements as
outlined above under "Quality Assurance". Components specified
herein are based on those manufactured by MBCI. Products of other
manufacturers will be considered for equality.
MATERIALS:
Steel Members Fabricated by Cold Forming: Comply with ASTM A 607,
Grade 55.
13130 - 2
Cold -Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM
A 366 or ASTM A 568
Hot -rolled Carbon Steel Sheet: Comply with requirements of ASTM A
568 or ASTM,A 569
Paint and Coating Materials: Comply with performance requirements
of the federal specifications indicated. Unless' specifically
indicated otherwise, compliance with compositional requirements of
federal specifications indicated is not required. -
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast -curing, lead-free, universal
primer, selected by the manufacturer for resistance to normal
atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems, and
capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats
despite prolonged exposure. Comply with FS TT-P-645.
STRUCTURAL FRAMING:
Secondary Framing: Provide the following secondary framing
members:
Roof Purling: "C"-or "Z"-shaped sections fabricated from 16 gage
(0.0598-inch) shop -painted roll -formed steel. Purlin spacers shall
be fabricated from 14-gage (0.0747-inch) cold -formed galvanized
steel sections.
Bolts: Provide shop -painted bolts except when structural framing
components are in direct contact with roofing and siding panels.
Provide zinc -plated or cadmium -plated bolts when structural framing
components are in 'direct contact with roofing and siding panels.
Shop Paintincr: Clean surfaces to be primed of loose mill scale,
rust, dirt, oil, grease, and other matter precluding paint bond.
Follow procedures of SSPC-SP3 for power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP7 for
brush-off blast cleaning, and SSPC-SP1 for solvent cleaning.
Prime secondary framing members with the manufacturer's standard
rust -inhibitive primer.
ROOFING PANELS:
Lock Seam: Precision roll -formed lock seam panels of minimum 24
gage steel (ASTM A446, Grade G; minimum Fy of 50,000 psi, coated
with 0.5 oz . per square foot of "Galvalume") with a 1 3/4" high
seam, 18 inches wide. Provide in maximum possible length to
minimize number of end joints, complete with roof transition fascia
including rib cover at transition, factory applied sealant in
interlocking lock seams. Product shall be equal to "Lokseam" roof
panels as manufactured by MBCI.
13130 3
FOR
PANEL FINISHES:
Roof Panels: Manufacturer's standard 0.5 oz. per square foot
"Galvalume" substrate with Dexstar 850 coating in color as selected
from standard colors.
PANEL FASTENERS•
Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets, self-locking
bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to
withstand design load.
Provide metal -backed neoprene washers under heads of fasteners
bearing on weather side of panels.
Use aluminum or stainless steel fasteners for exterior application
and galvanized or cadmium -plated fasteners for interior
applications.
Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal
alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform
j compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer.
Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roofing sheets by
means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating.
�- PANEL ACCESSORIES:
Provide the following sheetmetal accessories factory -formed of the
same material in the same finish as roof and wall panels:
Fascias.
Sealing Tape: Pressure -sensitive 100 percent solids grey
rpolyisobutylene compound sealing tape with release paper backing.
Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2
inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.
Joint Sealant: One -part elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or
silicone rubber sealant as recommended by the building
manufacturer.
FABRICATION:
General: Design prefabricated components and necessary field
connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and
disassembly.
Fabricate components in such a manner that once assembled, they may
be disassembled, repackaged, and reassembled with a minimum amount
of labor.
13130 - 4
Clearly and legibly mark each piece and part of the assembly to
correspond with previously prepared erection drawings, diagrams,
and instruction manuals.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ERECTION:
Purlins:- Provide rake or gable purlins with tight -fitting closure
channels and fascias. Secure purlins to structural framing and
hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods.
Secure each purlin to each supporting structural member with 2
Hilti #12 x 7/8" (#4 point) self -drilling screws or equal, unless
noted otherwise on the Drawings.
ROOFING:
General: Arrange and nest sidelap joints so prevailing winds blow
over, not into,,lapped joints. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one —
full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat
and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not
true to line. Protect factory finishes from damage..
Field cutting of exterior panels by torch is not permitted.
Flash and seal roof panels at eave and rake with rubber, neoprene, or other closures to exclude weather.
Roof Sheets: Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of seamed roof
sheets and between roof sheets and protruding vents, and
accessories.
Cleaning and Touch -Up: Clean component surfaces of matter that
could preclude paint bond. Touch up abrasions, marks, skips, or
other defects to shop -primed surfaces with same type material as
shop primer.
END OF SECTION 13130
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
13130 - 5
7
SECTION 13152 - SWIMMING POOL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION QE WORK:
Extent of swimming pool equipment is shown on drawings.
Types work and equipment specified in this section include the
following:
Purchase and installation of two (2) new one meter diving
towers complete with diving boards and all accessories.
Diving towers are to be installed with new concrete sub-
bases.
Purchase and installation of sixteen (16) new anchor sockets
for use with eight (8) existing cross -braced pool ladders.
Existing ladders (furnished by Owner) are to be reinstalled
in new concrete pool deck under this contract.
Purchase and installation of six (6) new anchor sockets for
use with six (6) new starting platforms. Starting platforms
shall be furnished and installed by the Owner.
Concrete work is specified under Division 3.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Manufacturer: Furnish all pool equipment by a single
manufacturer for the entire project.
SUBMITTALS:
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each type of pool
equipment. Include sections of typical members and dimensioned
elevations. Show anchors, grounds, 'reinforcement, accessories,
and installation details.
ProductData: Submit manufacturer's technical data and
installation .instructions for each pool equipment item and
component part, including data substantiating that materials
comply with requirements.
n4vzll
13152 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ONE METER DIVING TOWER:
One meter diving tower shall be equal to, KDI Paragon, Inc., One
Meter Paraflyte Diving Tower Model A1081A16D, Ultraflyte Grade
with rear ladder steps and full front guard rails each side.
Diving tower shall be furnished with. 16 foot Duraflex diving
board.
Pipe: 1.90" O.D., Type 304, stainless steel, polished and buffed
except as noted. Wall thickness to be 0.145".
Guard Rails: At lease 36" above diving board and extend at lease
to the pool edge. An intermediate, horizontal rail shall extend
the full length of the side rail.
Pedestal: Carbon steel weldment set at 15 degree tilt. The top
of the column shall have a cap of 3/16" thick plate reinforced
with gussets. Bottom of column shall terminate in a flange of
3/4" thick steel plate. The column shall be 8" O.D. x .187" wall
thickness.
Ladder Steps: Injection molded Cycolac, UV stabilized, and have
a raised non-skid tread.
Front Anchors: Standard anchor bolt assembly, equal to, KDI
Paragon No. 12307, consisting of eight 3/4" diameter carbon
steel, hooked anchor bolts.
Rear Anchors: Standard anchors, equal to, KDI Paragon No. 28201,
two-piece bronze casting.
Fulcrum: Geared adjustable fulcrum shall provide 24" of travel
at a constant level. The axial and gears shall be machined from
stainless steel bar stock. The gear holders and adjustable wheel
shall be satin chrome plated bronze. Provide standard locking
device.
Divine Board: Duraflex 16 foot diving board, equal to, KDI
Paragon No. 26101-1.
CROSS -BRACED LADDER ANCHOR SOCKETS:
Anchor sockets to be embedded in new concrete pool deck for the
reinstallation of existing pool ladders (furnished by Owner)
shall be KDI Paragon No. C1200B. Body shall be of cast bronze
and shall be 4 1/4" long. It shall be made to receive 1.900"
O.D. pipe. Provide with two longitudinal ridges, for prevention
of sidesway shall run full depth of the body on the I.D. The
locking wedge shall be cast bronze and bolts shall be stainless
steel.
92174 13152 - 2
Provide each anchor socket with one bronze cast, satin chrome
plated, Deluxe Escutcheon Plate No. C1210S with set screw.
STARTING PLATFORM ANCHOR SOCKETS:
Ouickset anchor sockets to be embedded in new concrete pool deck
for the installation of KDI Paragon Varsity Standard Quickset
Starting Platforms No.4176 (furnished by Owner) shall be KDI
Paragon No. 40-029. Contractor shall obtain anchor socket
spacing, location and installation instructions directly from KDI
Paragon, Inc. during submittal process.
.ART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION:
Provide setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and
directions for the installation of anchorages for all pool
equipment.
Install pool equipment in locations and at mounting heights
indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Keep perimeter lines straight, plumb, level and free of rack.
Provide temporary bracing for all anchors which are built into
I concrete.
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly
installed and that operating units properly functioning.
s
Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
Remove all concrete Break-in chalkboards only as recommended by
the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 13152
92174 13152 - 3
r-
SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL
ART 1 - GENERAL
PECIAL NOTE:
The Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued
thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents
issued by the Engineer, are a part of these specifications and the
accompanying plans, and shall be complied with in every respect.
All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is
on file at the Engineer's office, and shall be examined by all
bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation
due to omission of drawings.
Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the
General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall
govern.
CHECKING DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively.
The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications
thoroughly and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancies or
omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Engineer will
promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the
drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of
sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the
Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete
contract documents.
GENERAL:
In general, the lines to be installed by the various trades under
these specifications shall be run as indicated, as specified
herein, as required by particular conditions at the site, and as
required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to
complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner.
The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details
of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no
allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity
with these details.
The plans do not give exact details as to elevations, exact
locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines,
pilot lines and tither installation details. The Contractor shall
carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the
architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading
of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of
r-
} 15000 - 1
92174
y
installation supplied by -the manufacturers of the equipment to be
installed, and. thereby to, provide an integrated, satisfactorily
operating installation.
The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described
herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a
finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this
intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. _
DIMENSIONS:
Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor
shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be
responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or
compensation will be allowed on account of differences between
actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings.
INSPECTION OF SITE:
The accompanying plans do not indicate 'completely the existing
installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of
the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and
thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the
work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing
work, and in installing the new work. Failure to comply with this
shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in
connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing
installations and/or installing any new work.
PROGRESS OF WORK•
The contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress
of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for
notification from the Engineer or Owner.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled
as recommended by the manufacturer.
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not
definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the
Engineer before proceeding.
The Engineer reserves the right to call for samples of any item of
material offered in substitution.
15000 - 2
92174
r
C"
The Contractor shall be responsible for
materials to and on the job, and shall
storage and protection of these materials
acceptance of the job.
transportation of his
be responsible for the
and work until. the final
The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle,
tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for
the safe and expeditious execution of his contract.
The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and
all construction shall be done according to the best practice of
the trade.
SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL:
Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is
mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to
establish a standard. No substitution shall be made without review
by the Engineer, who will be the sole judge of equality.
Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the
conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute
prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service
for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the
Contractor shall replace the substitute material with the specified
material.
SHOP DRAWINGS•
Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Engineer for general
compliance with the design concept of the project and general
compliance with the information given in the contract documents.
Review by the Engineer and any action by the Engineer in marking
shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract
documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities,
dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site,
fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination
of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work.
PERMITS, FEES, ETC:
The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall
arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor
shall pay for any inspection fees or- other fees and charges
required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications.
TESTING:
The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform
the various tests as specified and required by the Engineer and as
required by the State and local authorities.
92174
15000 - 3
LAWS. CODES AND ORDINANCES:
All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local,
state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the
particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting
authority.
COORDINATION OF TRADES:
The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination
required between trades.
All items shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and
symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades.
CUTTING AND PATCHING:
The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform
all structural and general construction modifications and cut all
openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to
install all.work specified under that section or to repair any
defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of
this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Engineer
and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting
openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the
scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other
trades before bidding.
No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that
would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is
granted by the Engineer to do such cutting.
The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for
the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by
that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of
any part of the work installed hereunder.
Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the
cutting and patching required under the respective section with all
trades. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled
in the affected trade.
PAINTING•
If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it
shall be touched up and then given one coat of half flat half
enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match
the original. Paint factory primed surfaces.
Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and
supports and miscellaneous metal.
15000 - 4
92174
Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no
exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible.
SEALING:
r„The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, etc., -shall seal all
spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls,
partitions or floors. The packing shall effect a complete
waterproof seal where pipes pierce walls, floors or partitions.
r ;
RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS
Each bidder shall relocate those portions of the remaining present
installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with
the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of
all other trades.
EXISTING LINES:
Special care and precaution shall be used where existing lines are
to be opened.
SALVAGE MATERIALS:
All presently installed materials including pipes, valves,
fittings, fixtures, conduits, wires, wiring devices, etc. that are
not to be reused shall be removed by the Contractor under the
section in which the particular items normally fall whenever they
can be taken out of service. When the work is complete, there shall
be no "dead" lines left installed in any portion of the area being
remodeled, which shall include any temporary connections.
All items or materials removed from the project shall be made
available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option
to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any
claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated
by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the
contractor andshallbe removed from the site.
INSTALLATION DRAWINGS:
It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special
drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the
Engineer to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate
changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished
spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of
any item of equipment which he proposes to use.
These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual
installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall
not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to
the Engineer for his information.
15000 - 5
92174
r
EXCAVATION:
Perform all excavation work required in connection with the
installation of the work under this Division. After the work has
been installed, tested and approved, backfill all excavations with
suitable material under the direction of the Engineer. Include the
cutting of decks and other pavement and repairing the openings in
them to return to the surface to approximately its original
condition.
Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances
encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work
under this Division.
During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an
orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches
to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not
required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control
grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and
remove any water accumulating therein by pumping.
Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary.width for
proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as
possible. .
Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing
and support for pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its
entire length.
Take care not to excavate below the depths required. Whenever wet
or.otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly supporting
pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, remove such soil to a
depth required and backfill the trench to trench bottom grade with
3/4 inch crushed rock or coarse gravel or other suitable material.
$ACKFILLING:
Carefully backfill trenches with sand free from large clods of
earth or stone, deposited in 6-inch layers. Do not use blasted
rock, broken concrete or pavement, or large boulders as backfilling
material. Settling the backfill with water will be permissible and
will be a requirement when so directed.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in
cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the
various equipment items, carefully instruct the owner's
representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment
and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems,
the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all
procedures.
15000 - 6
92174
i
r
GUARANTEE:
Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall
r guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year
from date of final acceptance.
r COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS:
r
Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each
Division of the specifications shall furnish:
Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints
furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made
during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the
Engineer when the work is completed.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION:
Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each
Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete
r" and according to plans and specifications.
END OF SECTION 15000
r
a 15000 7
92174
6
SECTION 15100 - PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions,
Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental
Conditions.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and
installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation,
tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection
with the installation of the plumbing systems.
Replace fixtures.
Provide handicap bathrooms.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS•
Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise
specified or noted on the drawings, piping shall be bell and
spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each
heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and
each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of
manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be
used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or
push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used unless otherwise
prohibited.
Sanitary Fixture Waste Arms: Fixtures served by sanitary soil
waste and drain lines shall be connected using cast iron pipe and
fittings, red brass pipe, Type L hard copper tubing with cast brass
drainage fittings or lead. Use brass soldering nipples or ferrules
as required.
Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service
weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2"
and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier
weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except
that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar
15100 - 1
92174
t
Le
as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above
` grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited.
Domestic Water Lines: All water lines underground or under slabs
on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior
water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where
connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use
adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint
fittings.
Interior Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall be provided at the bottom of
each stack, at each change in direction, and in each horizontal run
at intervals not exceeding 50 feet in all interior soil, waste, and
drain lines. Where cleanouts occur in walls of finished areas, they
shall be concealed behind polished nickel -brass covers and secured
with vandalproof screws. Floor cleanout covers shall match
existing body. Wall cleanout should be such as Wade W-8450-B-V.
All cleanouts shall be the same size as the line served up to 4"
size and shall be 4" for all larger lines.
Vacuum Breakers: On each water supply line serving a plumbing
fixture, item of equipment, or other device which has a water
supply below the rim of the fixture, or which has a threaded or
tubing spout, provide and install an approved vacuum breaker.
These vacuum breakers shall be designed to prevent any possible
backflow through them. Where these are installed in chrome plated
lines, they shall be chrome plated to match.
VALVES:
General Service Valves: All bronze, screwed; equal to the
following Crane Nos:
.- Type:
1
Gate 3" and Smaller 428
P
Globe 3" and Smaller 1
Swing Check Valves 2" and Smaller: All bronze screwed, equal to
r Crane No. 37.
Plug Valves: Iron body, lubricated plug valves. Nordstrom Fig.
142 in sizes up to 2-1/2" or Fig. 143 in sizes 3" and larger.
MANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
Support all piper; as required by the plumbing code and as required
to prevent sagging. Cast iron lines shall be supported at 51
intervals and other pipes shall be supported on 81 intervals as a
minimum. Hangers shall be clevis type with adjusters.
15100 - 2
92174
t
PLUMBING FIXTURES:
The plate numbers represent fixtures that will be acceptable on the
job. Approved equal fixtures of Crane, American Standard, Eljer, _
and Kohler will be acceptable.
All exposed trim shall be chrome plated brass. This includes
faucets, fittings, stops, risers, strainers, tailpieces, traps,
waste, escutcheons, flush valves, brackets, vacuum breakers,
goosenecks, hole covers, bolts, nuts and etc. All threaded supply
fittings or outlets with tubing nozzles shall have back flow
preventers. All fixtures shall have stop valves.
Generally all wall hung ,fixtures shall be provided with chair .-
carriers so that no weight is supported from the wall.
All fixtures shall be cleaned before final acceptance.
Verify mounting height of each and every fixture before rough -in.
Where fixtures mate with walls or floor, the joint shall be grouted
with dental plaster, G. E. Silicone or other grout as'directed by
the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS:
Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer
connection at a uniform slope of 1/4" per foot to serve individual
fixtures or not less than 1/8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or
outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be
less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second.
Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than
10" above the roof.
Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved
drains to completely drain the system.'
Isolatincf Valves: The water supplies to each group of fixtures
shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser.
Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or
otherwise, provide access doors* -in the ceiling or chase.
FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS:
Push -On Pipe: The inside of the bell and the outside of the spigot
shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove oil, grit excess coating and
other foreign matter. Pipe that is not furnished with a depth mark
shall be marked before assembly to assure that the spigot end is
15100 - 3
92174
r
inserted to the full depth of the joint. Complete assembly
instructions from the pipe manufacturer shall be followed.
No -Hub Joints: Install according to manufacturer's instructions.
Rubber sleeve shall be neoprene. Clamps and bolts shall be
stainless steel.
F Threaded Pipes: Ream and deburr pipe after it is out and before it
is threaded. Stand each pipe on one end and hammer to remove all
PM foreign material. Full cut threads, but not more than 3 pipe
threads shall remain exposed when joint is completed. Make up
joints with graphite and oil or an approved graphite compound
applied to male threads only. Caulking of threaded joints to stop
7 or prevent leaks is prohibited.
a
Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of
,. fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly.
Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and had drawn
tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using
non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application.
r' No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder for all copper
k tubing, 95% tin, 5% antimony, except for drain and domestic water
which may be 50% lead, 50% tin.
REPAIR OF LEAKS:
All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows:
1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no
soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted.
2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake
the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak.
3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking
of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint.
When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system.
TESTING:
Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases,
insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered
inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines or systems,
as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping
and equipment before testing.
Domestic water Lines Interior: Test for 24 hours at 200 psig.
There shall be no leaks whatsoever.
15100 - 4
92174
I
Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines:Drainage and venting system
piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are
installed. After the plumbing fixtures have been set ad .their -
traps filled with water, the entire drainage and venting system
shall be submitted to a final test with smoke or peppermint if
required.
Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system
either in its entirety or in. sections. If the entire system is
tested, all openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except
the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to
the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each
opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall -
be tightly plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and
tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be
kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30
minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be
tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1" in 8 hours.
Other Tests: Perform all tests required to demonstrate that each
system is operating properly.
DISINFECTING•
After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish
all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection
of all domestic pipe lines. Disinfect for 24 hours with 50 PPM of
chlorine. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the
lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine —
residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million.
END OF SECTION 15100
15100 - 5
92174
SECTION 15200 - POOL FILTRATION AND CIRCULATION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions,
Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental
Conditions.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE•
This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and
installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation,
tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection
with the pool filtration and circulation systems.
Demolish 4 existing steel filter tanks, face piping and circulating
pump. Provide and install commercial hi -rate sand filter system.
Provide and install two new pumps with strainers. Replace all
above ground pit piping, valves, etc.
Flush, sterilize and balance system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FILTER UNIT:
The filter shall be equivalent to HRV36 Hydrotech Chemical
Corporate rapid -flow sand type, vertically, constructed complete
with face piping, operating valves, gauges, sight glass and air
relief systems.
Fiberglass non -corrosive and abrasion -proof tanks each with 12
lateral underdrain for optimal backwashing and cleaning,
quick -disconnect plumbing unions, dome lid with stainless steel
clamp and 10 year warranty. 6" piping (2 ea.) tandem kits model
f l5B2029 .
TER CAPACITY SPECIFICATIONS:
The filter system shall be a 8-36" fiberglass tanks with a total
effective area of 56.5 square feet. Filtration rate shall not
exceed 155 gallons per minute per square foot of filter area in
order to turn over a pool capacity of 351,000 gallons within a six
(6) hour period.
15200 - 1
92174
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS AND DATA PLATE:
Manual: A manual shall be provided with each filter and include
drawings; illustrations; operating instructions; charts; and parts
list to permit proper installation, operation, and maintenance.
Data Plate: Data plates shall be permanent, easy to read, and
securely attached to the filter. Data plates shall contain the
following:
1. Manufacturer's name and address
2. Filter model number
3. Filter serial number
4. Effective filtration area in ftz
5. Required clearance (vertical and horizontal for service and
maintenance)
6. Filtration and backwash design flow rate in gpm
7. Maximum working pressure
8. Steps of operation
9. Filtration rate in gpm per ftz of filter area
10. Media specifications
11. The data plate shall indicate whether the unit has been
evaluated for swimming pools, spas, or hot tubs.
SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA:
Flow Rate: The design filtration rate for the high rate sand
filter shall be at least 5 gpm per ftz but not greater than 20 gpm
per ftz. See following table.
Filter Performance Range
Area 5 GPM/Sq. Ft. 20 GPM/Sq. Ft.
7.07 sq.ft. 35.3 gpm 141 gpm
Backwash Rate: The design backwash rate shall be a minimum of 15
gpm per ftz, and shall render the media clean and permeable.
FILTER MEDIA•
Filter Sand: Filter sand shall be hard silicon material free of
carbonates or other foreign material, with anTeffective particle
size between 0.4 and 0.55 mm and a -uniformity coefficient not
exceeding 1.75.Filter sand shall be furnished with the filter, in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Supporting Material: If gravel is used to support filter sand, it
shall be rounded material, free of limestone and clay.
Freeboard: A freeboard between the top of filter media and lowest
draw off point of upper distribution system shall'be provided`'and
of sufficient height so no media is lost during backwash.
15200 - 2
92174
r
r
PIPING:
The filters shall be provided with all necessary face piping and
valves. Face piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC, Schedule 40 spools
and cast iron flanged fitting, mating influent and effluent
connections on the filter tank. All flanges shall be 125 pounds,
ASA flat face.
Circulating water piping above ground shall be Schedule 80 PVC
plastic piping with 125 pound flanges at butterfly valves. In -line
joints may be solvent welded.
Auxiliary piping for chemical feed lines shall be schedule 40 PVC
plastic.
Air relief piping and gage piping shall be copper.
Chlorine solution lines shall be polyethylene tubing.
All piping shall be tested for 4 hours at 75 PSIG.
r-
G VALVES:
Butterfly valves shall be provided of the 125 to 150 lb. type with
a Meehanite iron body, non -corrosive disc, No. 316 stainless steel
stem, and Buna N seat for "between flange" mounting.
Ball valves shall be Cabot CPVC plastic, or equal.
other valves shall be as specified under "Plumbing".
INSTRUMENTATION:
,. A pressure sight glass for a design pressure of 150 lbs. shall be
fitted on the backwash line. It shall be a 1-1/2 inch I.P.S.
bronze casting with a 3 inch diameter acrylic lens.
Each filter shall be equipped with a loss of head gauge graduated
in feet. The gauges shall be substantially mounted on the filter
shell or attached to the piping in an approved manner. The piping
rR shall be so arranged that the gauge will indicate the difference in
pressure at the underdrain system and at the top of the filter.
Each filter and the pump discharge line -shall be equipped with a
mercury manometer or rupture -proof bellows rate of flow indicator,
either of the venturi or orifice type, capable of accurately
indicating flows in either direction of filtering or backwashing.
+� The indicator shall be so designed that it does not require the
operation of any valves when changing from filtering to
backwashing. The indicator shall read the gallons per minute.
�., Means shall be provided to prevent the mercury from blowing over
into the water lines. The indicators shall be substantially
15200 - 3
92174
F
mounted in an approved manner. The flow indicator shall be a swim
Time model P322020, or equivalent requiring approval.
One straight -through -reading type sight glass having a brass frame
and easily removable glass shall be furnished and installed on the
backwash line.
Four sampling cocks shall be furnished and installed; one on the
pump line in the pump building and one on each outlet line from the
filters.
One pressure gauge with standard 4-1/2 inch dial shall be installed
on the discharge side of the pump.
WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS - GENERAL:
Pumps shall be as indicated in the schedule on the drawings. Each
shall be of the type, rotational speed, and have the flow rate and
characteristics listed. The name and model number listed for each
pump establishes a standard which the pump furnished must equal to
exceed. —
Pump casings and glands shall be suitable for operation under 150
psig static heads. —
Rotational speeds shall not exceed those scheduled. Under no
circumstances shall be a pump be offered with an impeller radius
greater than 90% of the distance from the shaft centerline to the
cutoff in the casing, except in the case of in -line circulators.
The head capacities are listed for bidding purposes only. The —
Contractor shall carefully calculate the head of each pump, taking
into consideration the pressure drops in all equipment, exact
lengths of pipe, valves, fittings, etc. These calculations shall
take into account actual routing of the piping and all other
factors that would determine the actual pumping head of each
system, and shall form the basis of final pump selection.
Motors shall be constant speed, drip proof motors, and shall be so
sized with relation to the pump impeller that the required brake
horsepower will not exceed the rated motor horsepower at any point
on the pump curve. Copies of manufacturer's performance curve
shall be submitted as shop drawings on each pump. Each curve shall
be clearly marked to indicate the diameter of the impeller and the
selection point. All pump motors shall have 1.15 service factor. -'
All pumps shall have gauge tappings.
15200 - 4
92174
Pump baseplates shall be of cast iron or welded structural steel
shapes, and shall have a raised lip and threaded drain connection.
Each baseplate on a pump handling chilled water shall be of
sufficient size to extend under and catch the drip from connecting
flanges and the outboard bearings.
All pumps shall be factory enameled.
i
CIRCULATING SELF -PRIMING PUMPS:
The circulating pumps shall be a close coupled unit especially
designed for commercial and public swimming pools where self -
priming characteristics are required.
r Rugged, self -priming cast iron um with enclosed
Description: gg , p g pump
bronze impellers and standard 4" x 6" flange connections. Pump
back pull-out design shall enable servicing of normal wearing parts
without disconnecting piping. Integral design base shall be
slotted for ease of mounting.
r' Hair and Lint Strainer: Separate bolt -on, STA-RITE Pkg. 184C.
1. Material: Cast iron body and cover; stainless steel toggle
�. bolts. Ductile iron wing nuts; perforated electro-polished
E stainless steel basket.
2. Size: 611 ANSI 125 bolted flange suction and discharge ports.
1100 cubic inch capacity
Pump Body: Volute type, back pull-out.
1. Port Size: 4" ANSI 125 bolted flange discharge port. 6" ANSI
125 bolted flange suction port.
2. Material: Cast iron.
3. Motor Adaptor: Cast iron.
4. Impeller: Bronze enclosed design.
5. Base: Cast iron integral design, slotted for mounting ease.
6. GPM: 460 @ 58' head.
Motor: Standard "JM" type. Frame Size: NEMA "C" flange. ]5 BP
open drip proof design
1. Shaft: Stainless steel sleeved, and gasketed construction.
2. Design: 3500 RPM, JM open drip proof, continuous duty, 3
phase.
3. Bearings: Sealed ball type, permanently lubricated.
4. Thermal Overload Protection: Required on all 3 legs.
5. Electrical Requirements: Three phase pumps shall be dual
voltage, dual frequency.
15200 - 5
92174
r
Pump shall operate within these limits:
1. Liquid Temperature: up to 125OF
2. Ambient Air Temperature: 1040F
3. pH Range: 6-9
COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION:
At the end of the installation and before acceptance by Owner, the
contractor shall do or furnish the following:
1. Fill pool to gutters, start up filtering and water treating
equipment, and monitor all equipment periodically until water
clears up to the point that a half dollar coin (U.S. money) can
be seen in the bottom of the deep end. All corrections will be
made as required to place the filtering systemandpool
facilities in satisfactory condition before substantial
completion of the pool facilities is declared. The Owner will
furnish water to fill the pool and chemicals as required.
2. Complete operational procedure for equipment and systems, i.e.,
"To put systems into operation, the followingsteps and
precautions shall be taken: " These procedures shall
be submitted to Engineer for approval and shall be mounted
under glass in the equipment rooms. IThese are to include
complete control diagrams and sequencing, along with operating
manuals, catalogue data and other useful operating information.
3.
An authorized Contractor's representative shall be assigned to
the project for start-up and instruction of the Owner's
personnel for a period of not less than two working days.
END OF SECTION 15200
15200 - 6
92174
r
t
SECTION 16000 - ELECTRICAL
l
r' PART 1 - GENERAL
NOTE:
Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions,
Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental
Conditions.
SUBMITTALS:
Submit manufacturer's data on all materials.
SCOPE:
The work shall include furnishing and installing all electrical
work, including final connections to all devices and placing them
in service.
SERVICE CONNECTIONS:
The Power Company will provide and install a secondary connection
t box where shown. Provide and install a reinforced concrete pad for
t the box of the size and configuration as directed by the Power
Company.
f
Furnish and install service entrance conductors in conduit from the
building, underground to the connection box. Leave sufficient
�. slack in the conductors at the connection box to facilitate
A
connections by the Power Company.
METERING:
All metering for Power Company billing will be done by existing
metering equipment.
SYSTEMS OF WIRING:
East End Electrical Service: Combined 120/240 volts, single phase,
3 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting and power.
West End Electrical Service: Combined 120/240 volts, three phase,.
r' 4 wire, 60 Hz. service for lighting and power.
16000 - 1
92174
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONDUITS•
Underground Plastic Conduit: Type 40, heavy wall, high impact
rigid virgin polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit and fittings,
conforming to NEMA Publications TC2 and TC3 and UL listed for
direct burial use; Carlon or equivalent.
Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick -wall; galvanized
inside and outside or galvanized outside with a protective coating
inside; UL listed and labeled according to Standard UL6; conforming
to ANSI Standard C80.1; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or
Allied.
Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Steel tubing, galvanized outside
and provided with a slick corrosion resistant interior coating; UL
listed and labeled according to Standard 797; conforming to ANSI
Standard C80.3; Pittsburg, Republic Steel, Robroy or Allied.
Liq_uidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Spirally wound, galvanized
steel strips, as for flexible metal conduit; with polyvinyl
chloride cover extruded over the exterior to make conduit
liquidtight; UL listed; Electri-flex type "LA" or equivalent.
CONDUIT FITTINGS:
Couplings and Terminations for Rigid Steel Conduit: Factory made
steel threaded couplings; bushing at all boxes,and cabinets, with
locknuts inside and outside box or cabinet.
Couplings and Terminations for Electrical Metallic Tubing: Join
lengths of EMT with steel compression type couplings and connectors
where exposed to the weather or in wet locations. otherwise use
steel, set -screw couplings and connectors. The connectors shall
have insulated throats or a smooth interior so as not to damage the
insulation during wire pulling operations.
Couplings and Terminations for Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit:
T & B 5271 Series adapters at connections between flexible and
rigid conduit; T & B 5331 Series nylon insulated throat, steel
connectors at box or cabinet terminations.
OUTLET BOXES:
UL listed of sizes and types specified.
Sheet Steel Boxes: Sheet steel not lighter than No. 14 gauge,
galvanized after fabrication; Raco, Steel City or Appleton.
16000 - 2
92174
r
�". Cast Metal Boxes: Cast iron or cast alloy with threaded hubs;
Crouse -Hinds, Appleton or Pyle National.
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES:
Sheet steel, galvanized inside and outside, with galvanized covers.
Small Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is not over 100
cubic inches, use standard outlet boxes.
Larqer Boxes: For boxes where the volume required is over 100
cubic inches, use cabinets as specified for panelboard cabinets
with covers of same gauge as boxes, secured with corrosion
resistant bolts or screws.
CONDUCTORS (600 VOLTS AND UNDER):'
jr Type: Soft drawn, annealed copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts,
continuous without weld, splice or joint, uniform cross-section,
free from flaws, scale and other imperfections; Okonite, Triangle,
Anaconda or Simplex. No. 8 and larger shall be stranded; No. 10
and smaller shall be solid.
Insulation: Branch circuits shall have type TW, THW, or THWN
insulation unless the type is specifically designated or specified.
Service feeders shall be type THW or THWN.
Circuits Subjected to High Temperatures: Type RHH conductors for
wiring in proximity to motors and devices subject to high
temperature because of high ambient temperature or convection or
radiant heat.
Lighting Fixture Conductors: Type and size approved. by the NEC for
the purpose.
JOINTS AND SPLICES:
Stranded Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure
connectors or Thomas and Betts Series 54000 compression connectors.
All connectors shall be of proper sizes to match conductor sizes.
All compression connectors shall be applied with properly sized
dies and tools. Split -bolt connectors are not acceptable.
Solid Copper Conductors: UL approved solderless bolted pressure
connectors; or UL approved electrical spring connectors of
"Scotchlok", Ideal or T & B "Piggy" make. All connectors shall be
of proper sizes to match conductor sizes. Split bolt connectors
are not acceptable.
92174
16000 - 3
r
COLOR CODING:
Phase conductors shall be black, red and orange for phases A,B, and
C respectively in the 240 volt system.
Neutral conductors shall be white. Grounding conductors shall be
green. -
CLASSIFICATION:
All wiring devices shall be "Specification Grade", and shall be UL
listed.
COLORS:
Devices shall have an ivory finish where mounted in walls finished
in light colors, and shall have a brown finish where mounted in
wall finished in dark colors.
WALL SWITCHES:
For loads not exceeding 1500 watts at 120=volts or 3000 watts at
277 volts:
DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO.
Single pole wall switch 1201 or 1201-I
Three-way wall switch 1203 or 1203-I
For loads exceeding above listing:
DEVICE HUBBELL CATALOG NO.
Single pole wall switch 1221 or 1221-I
Three-way wall switch 1223 or 1223-I
RECEPTACLES:
Receptacle. 15 Ampere. 125 Volt. 2 Pole., 3 Wire Grounding Duplex
with Self -Contained Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter: Hubbell No.
GF-5262.
For Flush Mounted Devices: Sierra Electric Corporation "S-Line"
0.040" stamped satin stainless steel except in unfinished or
machinery spaces, where plates shall be Sierra "P-Line" smooth
plastic to match devices.
PANELBOARDS•
Panelboard Cabinets: Furnish and install cabinets to serve the
various panelboards, of sizes as required to house the panelboards.
16000 - 4
92174
f,
CABINET CONSTRUCTION:
Rigidly constructed of
Underwriters' Laboratories
welded; edges turned over
sheet steel of gauges conforming to
Inc. requirements; corners overlapped or
to receive trim.
Cabinet Fronts: Cut from single sheet of not less than No. 12
gauge cold rolled sheet steel; fastened in place by adjustable trim
clamps which will allow plumbing; same size'as the cabinet box if
surface mounted; size to overlap the box a minimum of 3/4" on all
sides if flush mounted. Provide each door with a substantial flush,
cylinder tumbler lock and catch. On doors more than 48" high
provide a combination three point catch and lock with T-handle.
Provide each lock with two keys, with all locks keyed alike.
Finish: All back boxes galvanized; all exposed metal, including
fronts, primed and finished in gray lacquer.
PANELBOARDS, GENERALLY:
r' Mount all panelboards in cabinets as specified hereinbefore,
arranged for flush or surface mounting as indicated on drawings.
Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare",
provide the device complete for operation. Where such a device is
scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and
all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of
f" device scheduled. Where a breaker or switch is scheduled to serve
a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation.
All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free,
thermal magnetic, indicating type unless noted otherwise. Provide
all multiple pole breakers with common trip and single operating
handle; handle ties between breakers are unacceptable. Branch
circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing
adjacent units.
Connect all.circuit interrupting devices with sequence phasing.
Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of
circuits mounted in a cardholder on the inside of the panelboard
cabinet. Cover directory with transparent sheet plastic.
All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories Inc.
and the building main panel shall be listed as suitable for
"Service Entrance Equipment."
Submit shop drawings of each panelboard for review before
commencing fabrication; drawings shall indicate number, size,
interrupting rating and type of circuit protective devices;
dimensions, gauges and type of construction of cabinets, size and
material of main bus and lugs, and any other pertinent information
r .
16000 - 5
92174
necessary to determine compliance with the . drawings and
specifications.
Provide each panelboard with a factory engraved` nameplate which -
shall identify the panelboard name.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS:
Panelboards shall have the number and size of bolted -in circuit
breakers as scheduled. Panels shall be of General Electric, Square
D,- Westinghouse or ITE manufacture, equivalent to the General
Electric panels listed below.
Panelboards for 208 or 240 volt Service: General Electric Type AQ,
with type THQB circuit breakers.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
Unless otherwise noted or required, all disconnect switches shall
be UL listed and shall meet NEMA Standard KS1-1969 for Type HD
heavy duty switches. Switches shall be unfused unless noted
otherwise; quick make, quick break; in NEMA 3R enclosures if
exposed to the weather; elsewhere in NEMA 1 general purpose
enclosures unless special enclosures are required. All motor
circuit switches shall be horsepower rated.
Switches shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or
ITE manufacture, equivalent to General Electric Type TH quick make,
quick break switches.
Where space does not permit use of the above specified switches,
such as within weatherproof fan housings, etc., use suitable
horsepower rated tumbler switches as unfused disconnects; General
Electric Type RB or equivalent.
Where disconnect switches are used to disconnect starters, provide
auxiliary poles in switches as required to disconnect all auxiliary
control circuits in starters.
FUSES:
Furnish and install all fuses necessary for leaving the
installation complete and in working order, including a complete
set of fuses in each spare switch.
Upon completion of the work provide a standard carton (but not less
than 3 fuses where a carton does not contain as many as 3) of each
size of each type of fuse used. These spare fuses are in addition
to fuses in spare switches and replacement fuses blown during
construction and testing.
16000 - 6
92174
E,
r" Place a fuse identification label, showing type and size of the
" required fuses, inside the door of each enclosure requiring fuses.
r' Fuses shall conform to the latest NEMA Standards, and shall be UL
listed and labeled (except as noted otherwise) They shall conform
to the UL classes listed hereinafter. Voltage ratings shall be
suitable for the systems to which the fuses are applied.
Where the spacing of fuse clips in equipment is greater than
required by the proper size of fuse, use suitable fuse reducers to
r fit the fuses.
e:
Fuses shall be of the classes and types listed below, the type
r designations referring to those indicated on the plans.
1. Type LP: Class RK-1; Bussman Type LPN or LPS "Low Peak".
Fuses shall be available in ratings 0-600 amperes, shall be
current limiting dual element with tie delay, and shall have
interrupting rating of 200,00 RMS symmetrical amperes. Fuses
shall be equipped with slotted blades, and switch fuse clips
shall be provided with matching NEC fuse rejection feature.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Bussman, Littelfuse.
INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:
Provide and install a lighting fixture on each and every lighting
outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations
on the drawings and as specified herein. Should any designations
be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as
used in rooms of similar usage. All features specified or
scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog
number given in the specifications or schedule lacks the required
numerals, prefixes or suffixes corresponding to the features called
for.
Fixtures: All lighting fixtures shall bear the label of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. Furnish scale drawings, catalog
data, samples of finish, distribution curves, and any other data
required by the Architect for every type fixture.
r'
Energy Saving Ballasts: All 2 lamp, 40 watt, rapid start ballasts
shall be energy saving ballast. The ballast shall be high power
factor, UL labeled, Class P with automatic reset features and "A"
r' sound rating.
Lamps: Fully equip each fixture with a full set of new lamps at
r► the completion and acceptance of the work; lamps shall be of the
best grade, and of the sizes and types specified; General Electric,
Westinghouse or Sylvania.
C`
92174
i
16000 - 7
Incandescent Lamps: Inside frosted unless specified or recommended
otherwise by the fixture manufacturer.
Fluorescent Lamps: Standard Cool White.
OTORS:
All motors will, unless otherwise noted, be furnished under other
Divisions of the specifications, or will be furnished by the Owner.
Where motors are mounted integrally with items of equipment, they
will be erected in place with such equipment ready for electrical --
connection; such erection is not a part of the work under this
Division. Where motors are to be installed as separate items,
their foundations, anchor bolts and other provisions necessary to _
their erection will be provided as a part of the work of the
Division under which they are furnished; their erection and final
setting are a part of the work of this Division, and shall be done
by specially skilled millwrights or similar craftsmen.
MOTOR STARTERS:
All motor starters (controllers) and control equipment shall be
furnished and installed under this Division of the specifications.
The starters and control equipment shall conform with the schedule
on the drawings.
Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual
units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, —
combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination
starter/unfused disconnect switch units as indicated.
Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or Gould
manufacture with the proper enclosures.
Provide pushbutton stations, pilot lights and hand -off -automatic
switches as scheduled on drawings. Provide auxiliary contacts on
starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified in
Division 15 or as noted elsewhere. Starter disconnecting means
shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits
when the starter is disconnected.
Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one
per phase.
Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120
volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary
leg grounded.
16000 - 8
92174
r
Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall
consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, with a pilot light and
overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where,the starter is
installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a
stainless steel coverplate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
EXCAVATION:
Perform all excavation work required in connection with the
installation of the work under this Division. After the electrical
r work has been installed, tested and approved, backfill all
excavations with suitable material under the direction of the
Architect. Include the cutting of all sidewalks, streets and other
.pavement and repairing the openings in them to return to the
l surface to approximately its original condition.
l Perform all excavations of every description of whatever substances
encountered and to the depths required for installation of the work
j under this Division.
During excavation, stack material suitable for backfilling in an
orderly manner a sufficient distance from the banks of the trenches
to prevent slides or cave-ins. Remove all excavated material not
required or suitable for backfill, or waste as directed. Control
grading to prevent surface water from flowing into excavations and
remove any water accumulating therein by pumping.
Use open cut grading and make trenches of the necessary width for
proper installation of the lines with banks as nearly vertical as
possible.
Grade the bottom of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing
and support for conduit or duct on undisturbed soil at every point
along its entire length.
Except at locations where excavation of rock from the bottoms of
trenches is required, take care not to excavate below the depths
required. Where rock excavation is required, remove the rock to a
minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the trench depths specified.
Backfill the overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench
excavation to the proper level with 3/4 inch crushed rock or the
equivalent in coarse gravel prior to the installation of conduit or
ducts. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil theft is incapable
of properly supporting conduits or ducts is encountered in the
trench bottom, remove such soil to a depth required and backfill
the trench to trench bottom grade with 3/4 inch crushed rock or
coarse gravel or other suitable material.
r
ik
7 16000 9
92174
BACKFILLING:
Carefully backfill trenches with earth, sandy clay, sand and
gravel, soft shale or other approved material free from large clods
of earth or stone, deposited in thoroughly and carefully rammed
6-inch layers. Do not use blasted rock, broken concrete or
pavement, or large boulders as backfilling material. Settling the
backfill with water will be permissible and will be a requirement
when so directed. Re -open any trenches improperly filled or where
settlement occurs to the depth required for proper compaction, then
refill, mound over and smooth off.
Backf ill open trenches across roadways or other areas to be paved
as specified above except that the entire depth of trench shall be
backfilled in 6-inch layers, each layer moistened and compacted to
a density of not less than 95% Standard Proctor in such manner as
to permit the rolling and compaction of the filled trench together
with the adjoining earth to provide the required bearing value and
permit paving of the area immediately after backfilling is
completed. Along all other portions of the trenches, grade the
ground to a reasonable uniformity and leave the mounding over the
trenches in a uniform and neat condition.
OPENING AND CLOSING PAVEMENT:
Where excavation requires the opening of existing walks, streets,
drives or other existing pavement, including "black topping," cut
the pavement as required. Hold the size of the cut to a minimum
consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the installation
of the new work is completed and the, excavation has been
backfilled, patch the paving using materials to match those cut
out. Take care that the patches are level with the original
surfaces and thoroughly bond with them.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND PLASTIC CONDUIT:
Install at least 30 inches below finished grade unless noted to the
contrary. Assemble and install raceways in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions'. Make joints with couplings and solvent
cement. Fabricate bends of 30 degrees or more with factory -made
elbows, or make field bends with proper heating equipment. Bends
showing signs -of overheating or flattening are unacceptable. Ream
ends of all conduit before joining.
"Snake" plastic conduit in trench, from side to side, with a
complete cycle every 40 feet to allow for expansion and
contraction. Maintain this configuration during backfilling.
Where conduit turns up out of earth, or floor slabs, change from
plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit below grade and outside
of such structures. Do not extend any plastic conduit above grade.
16000 - 10
92174
i
Make similar change from plastic to rigid galvanized steel conduit
at connections to underground pull or junction boxes. Wrap all
steel conduits and fittings buried in earth as .specified elsewhere
herein, or use PVC coated steel conduits.
INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND STEEL CONDUIT:
All steel conduit in earth shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit.
Wrap such conduit with 3M Company 0.020 inch thick No. 51
"scotchrap" vinyl plastic tape, half lapped to give a double
thickness wrap. Remove all oil, grease and dirt from conduit with
a suitable solvent, and clean and dry conduit before wrapping. If
conduit is pre -wrapped in the shop and then cut and joined on the
job, wrap all joints on the job, overlapping pipe wrapping 3" on
both sides of joints.
r INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS:
All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or
electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise.
r^ Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and
unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless
otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to
,.. the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner.
Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on
roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits or IMC. Above grade
interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit,
intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing.
Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried .in earth shall be
PVC or rigid galvanized steel.
Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn
in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with
approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which
conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured.
Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than
12" long at final connections to all motors, controls and other
devices subject to movement because of vibration or mechanical
adjustment.
Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3"
of hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are
unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1" from insulation on
the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid
installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers
and other like objects operating at high temperatures.
16000 - 11
92174
r-
Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out
all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel
boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or
sheet metal outlet boxes by''galvanized 'locknuts, inside and
outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type
couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit
systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit
systems.
Protection of Raceways: Seal ends of all raceways with blank discs
("pennies"), push pennies or other approved_ closers during
construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all
plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways
before pulling in conductors.
Penetrations: Wherever raceways pass through floors, walls
partitions, etc., carefully fill any space between the outside of
the raceway and the building material topreventpassage of air,
water, 'smoke and fumes. Filling material shall be fire resistive
and, in general, similar to.the basic building materials through
which the raceway passes.
CONDUIT SUPPORTS:
Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National
Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by
conditions.
Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or
horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry
individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1/4" and larger on
Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated
strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits' sma 1 ler than 1-1/4"
are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically
suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be
supported on ceiling runner channels. Where conduits smaller than
1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the
structure or bar joists (where present) or support them'on threaded
hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or
to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a
sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the
ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to
mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels.
Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at
the same elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of
sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rodsor
pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the
number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support.
Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported.
16000 - 12
92174
r�
INSTALLATION OF OUTLET BOXES:
Usage: Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a
metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate.
Boxes recessed in construction.: Sheet steel boxes.
For Lighting Fixture outlets: 4" octagonal by 1-1/211 minimum depth
with 3/8" fixture stud for incandescent lights which are surface
mounted, wall mounted or suspended.
For Wall Switches, Receptacles and Communications Use: Use 411x4"
size with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover, or
finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the
device requires a larger box.
Wall Mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8"
deep, unless otherwise noted or unless wall construction requires
a smaller box.
Boxes for Exposed Work: Cast metal boxes.
Boxes for Outdoors: Cast metal boxes with gasketed covers.
INSTALLATION OF PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES:
Sizing: Size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with NEC,
using larger sizes than required by code where job conditions so
indicate.
Mounting: Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction,
independent of conduit systems. On concealed conduit systems where
boxes are not otherwise accessible, set box covers flush with
finished surfaces for access.
WIRE PULLING:
Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling
conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene,
nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach
r- pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by
pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be
installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Pull no
conductors into conduits until all work of a nature which may cause
rinjury to conductors is completed. Use an Underwriters' listed
cable pulling compound where necessary.
Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and
shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the
insulation on which they are used.
i
16000 - 13
92174
I
Pulling Devices in Empty Raceways: Provide in every empty raceway,
not containing conductors to be installed by this Contractor, a
suitable pull line to facilitate future installation of wiring.
Lines shall be free from splices and shall have ample exposed
length at each end. Identify each end of each line with a linen
tag bearing complete information as to the purpose of the raceway
and the location of its other end. All lines shall be nylon or
polyethylene cord with a tensile strength not less than 200 pounds.
INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRE___(600 VOLTS AND UNDER
Feeders: Run all feeders their entire length in continuous pieces
without joints or splices, insofar as practicable. Make joints in
branch circuits only where circuits divide as shown on drawings.
Such joints shall consist of one through circuit to which shall be
spliced the tap circuit.
Sizes: No wire shall be smaller than No. 12 except for signal or
control circuits, and except for individual lighting fixture taps
as permitted by the National Electrical Code.
Receptacle and Motor Branch Circuits: No. 12 conductors unless
noted or scheduled otherwise.
Joints and Splices: Make joints and splices only where necessary
and only at outlet boxes and pull boxes. All joints shall be
mechanically and electrically secure.
Conductor splices in wet locations shall be made in accordance with
the conductor manufacturer's recommendations.
Identifying Tags: Non-ferrous; stamped to clearly identify each
circuit. Securely fasten tags to all cables, feeders and power
circuits in pull boxes, lighting, power and distribution
panelboards, etc.
Bundling Conductors: Bundle all conductors in panelboards,
cabinets and the like, using marlin twine lacing or nylon straps
made for the purpose.- Bundle conductors larger than No. 10 in
individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups.
CIRCUIT IDENTIFICATION:
At each wiring device, install a label on the inside of the
coverplate which shall identify the panel and circuit number to
which the device is finally connected. The labels shall be made on
the job with indent type Dynamo adhesive tape. Attach the label to
the plate with contact cement or other suitable adhesive material.
In lieu of a label, the panel and circuit number may be marked on
the inside of the coverplate with an indelible pencil.
16000 - 14
92174
4 SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT GROUNDING:
Provide adequate and permanent service neutral and equipment
grounding in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and
subject to the following additional requirements.
Connect the service ground and equipment ground to a common point
within the metallic enclosure containing the main service
disconnecting means. From the common point of connection of the
service ground'and equipment ground, run in conduit a combined
service and equipment grounding conductor without joint or splice
to the grounding electrodes indicated on the drawings. Use only UL
listed grounding connectors of copper alloy or brass.
Size grounding conductors in accordance with National Electrical
Code Tables 250-94 and 250-95.
The building structural steel frame shall be grounded to the
building service grounding electrode, using the conductor size
specified in National Electrical Code Section 250-94(a).
GROUNDING RACEWAYS:
Assure the electrical continuity of all metallic raceway systems,
pulling up all conduits and/or locknuts wrench tight. Where
expansion joints or telescoping joints occur, provide bonding
jumpers. Where flexible metallic conduit is employed, provide a
green -insulated grounding jumper installed in the flexible conduit.
Install a separate green -insulated conductor in each non-metallic
conduit.
Provide grounding bushings on all service and feeder raceways
terminating within panelboards, cabinets, and all other enclosures.
Provide grounding conductors from such bushings to the frame of the
enclosure and to the ground bus or equipment grounding strap. Size
grounding conductors in accordance with NEC Table 250-95.
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS:
Provide a separate, green -insulated copper grounding conductor,
with insulation of the same rating as phase conductors, for each
feeder and for each branch circuit indicated. Install the
grounding conductor in the same raceway with the related phase and
neutral conductors, and connect the grounding conductor to pull
boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less.
16000 - 15
92174
INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR FIXTURES:
Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures' are
diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where
such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general
construction and securely attached.
Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with
the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid
ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided
the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where
they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to
span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members.
Where fixtures are installed in a
straight and plumb. Lens shall
part of the lamp shall be visible.
EQUIPMENT WIRING:
continuous row, the row shall be
be aligned in all planes and no
Connect complete for operation all items of heating and pool
equipment. Outlets of various types have been indicated at
equipment locations, but no indications of exact location or scope
of the work are shown on the drawings. Refer to the Owner and to
the various Contractors for the work under the other Divisions for
the scope of connections to equipment furnished by them and for the
exact locations of all items. Request of the Owner and the
aforementioned suppliers and contractors all rough -in drawings
required for proper installation of the electrical work, in ample
time to permit preparation of the drawings and thus avoid delays on
the job.
Where disconnect switches or circuit breakers are not provided
integral with control equipment for motors and other electrical
appurtenances, provide and install all disconnect switches required
by the National Electrical Code and/or indicated.
POOL BONDING:
Install pool bonding as required by the NEC and as shown on the
drawings. The bonding shall be inspected by the architect/engineer
before it is covered.
END OF SECTION 16000
16000 - 16
92174
F
RODGERS POOL RENOVATION (92148)
SPECIFICATIONS INDEX
r
ARCHITECT/STRUCTURAL
Section
Pacfes
01050
Final Cleaning
2
01300
Shop Drawings Product Data and Samples
3
r
01600
Materials
3
02070
Selective Demolition
5
02110
Site Clearing
2
r
02200
Earthwork
9
03300
Concrete Work
17
03721
Repair Mortar
4
04200
Unit Masonry
12
r
04230
Reinforced Unit Masonry
4
05500
Metal Fabrications
8
06100
Rough Carpentry
5
7
07900
Joint Sealers
7
08110
Steel Doors and Frames
6
08710
Finish Hardware
6
09900
Painting
12
r
10420
Specialty Signs
3
10800
Toilet Accessories
4
13130
Metal Building Components
5
13152
Swimming Pool Equipment
3
MECHANICAL
Section
Pacres
15000
General Provisions for Plumbing and Electrical
7
15100
Plumbing
6
15200
Pool Filtration and Circulation System
7
ELECTRICAL
Section Pacres
16000 Electrical it
SECTION 01050 - FINAL CLEANING
PART 1 GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The Contractor shall use experienced workmen or professional
cleaners for final cleaning.
Upon completion of all work, and just before request for ,final
inspection, the Contractor shall have all construction areas or
spaces cleaned and in such condition that the Owner will have no
further cleaning requirements.
Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in
sections of Division 2 through Division 16. Comply with
manufacturer's instructions for cleaning operations.
The following are examples, but not limitations of cleaning
levels required:
Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels.
Clean transparent materials, including windows and transom
glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which
are noticeable as vision -obscuring materials. Replace
broken glass and damaged transparent materials.
Clean exposed face brick and other interior hard -surfaced
finishes, to a dirt -free condition, free of dust, stains,
films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except
as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural
weathering exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces
to original reflective condition.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean
and remove excess lubrication and other substances.
Remove construction debris from limited -access spaces
including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment wells,
attics and similar spaces.
Clean concrete floors in non -occupied spaces broom clean.
92148 01050 - 1
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of
stains including those resulting from water exposure.
SITE (YARDS AND GROUNDS) CLEANING:
Sweep and remove stains from exterior concrete slabs, walks,
porches and paved areas. Also remove temporary tape, wrappings,
coatings, labels, grease, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, and
other foreign materials from exterior items and surfaces caused
by new construction operations.
Clean project site (lawns and grounds), including landscape
development areas, of all debris and foreign substances. Rake
grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even -
textured surface. Remove excess fill and fine grade around all
new site utility construction. Repair all areas damaged by
vehicle traffic or other construction operations.
RUBBISH•
All debris, surplus material, and other items specified or
indicated for removal and not claimed by the Owner as salvaged
materials shall become property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the site and disposed of in a lawful manner.
END OF SECTION 01050
92148
01050 - 2
SECTION 01300 - SHOP DRAWINGS. PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES
GENERAL:
Submit to the Architect shop drawings, product data and samples
required by specification sections.
Prepare and submit a list of required submittal of Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples. List submittal items in numerical order
of specification section numbers. Identify each submittal in list
with an item number, specification section number, name of
product and type of submittal (Shop Draw?ngs, Product Data,
Samples). Include dates for submission and need dates for each
item.
SHOP DRAWINGS•
Original drawings, prepared by Contractor, subcontractor,
supplier or distributor, which illustrate some portion of the
work, showing fabrication, layout, setting or erection data
prepared by a qualified detailer.
PRODUCT DATA•
Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings: Modify drawings to
delete information which is not applicable to Project.
Supplement standard information to provide additional information
applicable to Project.
Manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules,
performance charts, illustrations and other standard descriptive
data:
Clearly mark each copy to identify pertinent materials,
products or models.
Show dimensions and clearances required.
Show performance characteristics and capacities.
Show wiring diagrams and controls.
SAMPLES•
Physical examples to illustrate materials, equipment and
workmanship, and to establish standards by which completed work
is judged.
Field samples and mock-ups: Erect at Project site at location
acceptable to Architect.
92148 01300 - 1
r.
e .
rConstruct each sample or mock-up complete including work of all
` trades required in finished work.
CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES:
Review shop drawings, product data and samples prior to
submission to Architect. Initial, sign, or stamp, certifying to
review of submittal.
Verify the following:
Field measurements.
Field construction criteria.
Catalog numbers and similar data.
Coordinate each submittal with requirements of work and
contract documents.
Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submittal
is not relieved by Architect's review of submittal.
Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submittal from
requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Architect's
review of submittal, unless Architect gives written acceptance of
specific deviations .
Notify Architect, in writing at time of submission, of
deviations in submittal from requirements of Contract
Documents.
Begin no work which requires submittal until return of submittal
with Architect's stamp and initials or signature indicating
review.
After Architect's review, distribute copies.
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:
Schedule submissions at least 30 days before date reviewed
submittal will be needed, in accordance approved submittal
schedule.
Submit number of copies of product data which Contractor requires
for distribution, plus 3 copies which will be retained by
Architect.
Submit number of samples specified in each of specification
sections.
Accompany each submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate,
containing the following:
92148 01300 - 2
Date. .
Project title and number.
Contractor's name and address.
The number of each Shop Drawing, Product Sample submitted.
Notification of deviations from Contract
Other pertinent data.
Submittals shall include the following:
Date and revision dates. -
Project Title.
Name of Architect, Contractor, subcontractor, supplier and
manufacturer.
Identification of product or material.
Relation to adjacent structure or materials.
Field dimensions, clearly identified as such.
Applicable reference standards. -
Other pertinent data required by Specifications.
Identification of deviations from Contract Documents.
Contractor's stamp, initialed or signed, certifying to -
review of submittal, verification of field measurements
and compliance with Contract documents.
Space large enough to accept Architect's approval stamp.
RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS:
Shop Drawings: Revise initial drawings as required and resubmit
specified for initial submittal.
Indicate on drawings any changes which have been made, other
than those requested by Architect.
Product Data and Samples: Submit new data and samples as 'required
for initial submittal. -
DISTRIBUTION OF SUBMITTAL AFTER REVIEW:
r
Distribute copies of shop drawings and product data which carry
Architect's stamp as required for construction, including
Contractor's file, job site .file, record documents file, other
prime contractors, subcontractors, supplier and fabricator.
END OF SECTION 01300
92148 01300 - 3
SECTION 01600 - MATERIALS
UNAVAILABILITY OR LATE DELIVERIES:
Contractor shall order and schedule delivery of materials in
ample time to avoid delays in construction. If an item is found
to be unavailable, Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer
immediately to permit mutual selection of suitable substitute. If
Contractor fails to order materials in ample time to avoid delays
in construction, an approved material shall be substituted at no
extra cost to the Owner. Or, at the Architect/Engineer's
discretion, approval of a. substitute will be given only upon
agreement by the Contractor to remove substituted material at a
later date agreeable to Owner, and replace it at Contractor's
expense with material originally specified. Such approval shall
be subject to the same terms as for "Substitutions".
MATERIAL TESTING:
Laboratory tests and inspections specified or required of
material and finish articles incorporated in the work shall be
made by bureaus, laboratories or agencies approved by the
Architect/Engineer. Reports will be submitted to the
Architect/Engineer or distributed as established at the
preconstruction conference. Cost of testing and inspections will
be paid for by the Owner.
Contractor shall furnish promptly, without additional charge, all
reasonable facilities, labor, and materials necessary for safe
and convenient inspection and tests required by the
Architect/Engineer. Inspection and tests will be performed in
manner not to delay work unnecessarily. Contractor will be
charged with cost of extra inspection when material or work is
not ready at time.inspection is required.
Test samples as Architect/Engineer may deem necessary shall be
procured from material or equipment delivered for use in the
work. If any test sample fails to meet. specification
requirements:
,,.. Previous approval may be withdrawn and such material or equipment
may be subject to removal and replacement by Contractor at his
expense with material or equipment meeting' specification
requirements.
Architect/Engineer may refuse consideration of further samples of
same brand or make for testing. In any case, Owner will pay cost
of only one additional test of material for same usage; should
second sample of same or like material also fail test, Contractor
shall bear cost of all further testing until Architect/Engineer's
approval is granted.
92148 01600 - 1
At Owner's discretion, defective material and equipment may be
permitted to remain in place subject to adjustment of Contract
price.
MATCHING MATERIALS: Materials required to match existing work and
not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in
quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be
comparable to adjacent existing work. The Owner shall be the sole
authority in the determination of an acceptable match.
SPECIFIED ITEMS - SUBSTITUTIONS:
In addition to the requirements 'of General Conditions Article V,
5.13 the following applies:
Whenever catalog numbers and specified brands or trade names,
followed by the designation "or equal" are used in conjunction
with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned
in these specifications, they are used to establish the standards
of quality and utility required. Substitutions which are equal in
quality and utility to those specified will be approved, subject
to the following provisions: All substitutions must be approved
by the Architect/Engineer and Owner in writing. For this purpose
the Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer within 30
calendar days after recording of the Contract, a typewritten list
containing a description of each proposed substitute item or
material. Sufficient data, drawings, samples, literature or other
detailed information as will demonstrate -to' the
Architect/Engineer that the proposed substitute is equal in
quality and utility to the material specified shall be appended
to this list. The Architect/Engineer will approve after receiving
written concurrence from the Owner, in writing, such proposed
substitutions as are, in his opinion, equal in quality
and utility to the times or materials specified. Such approval
shall not relieve the Contractor from complying with the
requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and the
Contractor shall be responsible at his own expense for any
changes resulting from his proposed substitutions which affect
other parts of the work.
Failure of the Contractor to submit proposed substitutions for
approval in the manner described and within the time prescribed
shall be sufficient cause for disapproval by the
Architect/Engineer or any substitutions otherwise proposed.
Whenever catalog numbers and specific brands or trade names are
not followed by the designation "or equal" or used in' conjunction
with a designated material, product, thing or service mentioned
in these specifications, no substitutions will be approved.
SUBSTITUTIONS: Substitutions of any materials other than those
specifically called for shall be submitted to the
92148 01600 - 2
Architect/Engineer
for approval.
i
SPECIFIED BY
TRADE NAME: Reference to items by specific
r'
,ITEMS
trade name is made
as a basis of quality
and function. Equivalent
items may be used
in their stead;
however, the right of
determining such
quality shall remain
with. the Owner's
�..
Representative. The
terms "similar to",
"approved", or "orequal"
or similar phrases
shall be interpreted
similarly.
LABELS: Manufacturer's or trade names together with model or
r serial designations, grade markings, fire ratings, etc. will be
permitted and are required on certain components of the work.
These items shall be placed in concealed, but accessible
locations, and absolutely no labels advertising any manufacturer
or trade name will be permitted on exposed portions of components
without written authorization from Architect/Engineer.
MATERIALS STORAGE:
The contractor will be allowed space on the grounds for the
storage of his materials, but he shall provide all necessary
enclosures, doors, and locks, and he shall be solely responsible
for the safekeeping of all materials, tools, etc., stored
therein.
Such storage facilities shall be moved when so directed by the
Architect/Engineer at the Contractor's expense. After completion
of the work, they shall be completely removed and all materials
taken from the premises.
MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS:
All manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be
applied, installed, connected, erected, secured, used, cleaned
and put in operation as recommended, directed or specified by the
manufacturer, for the type of installation called for.
Where work is specified to be in accordance with product
manufacturer's directions, Contractor shall procure such
information in sufficient quantities to supply interested
parties.
TEST REPORT COPIES:
The testing laboratory agency shall supply copies of all tests,
reports, and inspections to the following:
Architect - 2 copies
General Contractor - 2 copies
Consulting Structural Engineers - 1 copy.
j END OF SECTION 01600
4
L -
92148 01600 - 3
I
7
SECTION 02070 — SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section. _
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of demolition work is shown on drawings.
Types of Selective Demolition Work: Demolition requires the
selective removal and subsequent offsite disposal of the
following:
Portions of existing exterior masonry walls and structure _
indicated on drawings and as required to accommodate new
construction.
The entire existing concrete pool deck, edge and precast
gutter, to include existing concrete diving platforms and
platform bases.
Removal of existing exterior free standing items such as
steel pipe guard stands.
Removal and salvage of existing pool ladders and anchor
sockets to be reused or relocated where indicated on
drawings.
Removal work specified elsewhere
Cutting non-structural concrete floors and masonry walls for
underground piping and ducts, and for above grade piping,
ducts, and conduit is included with the work of the
respective mechanical and electrical Divisions 15 and 16
specification sections.
Related work specified elsewhere:
Remodeling construction work and patching is included
within the respective sections of specifications, including
removal of materials for re -use and incorporated into
remodeling or new construction. "-
Relocation of pipes, conduits, ducts, other mechanical and
electrical work are specified by respective trades.
92148 02070 - 1
rot
SUBMITTALS:
Schedule: Submit schedule indicating proposed methods and
sequence of operations for selective demolition work to Owner's
Representative for review prior to commencement of work. Include
coordination for shut-off, capping, and continuation of utility
services as required, together with details for dust and noise
control protection.
Provide detailed sequence of demolition and removal work to
ensure uninterrupted progress of Owner's on -site operations.
Coordinate with Owner's continuing occupation of portions of
existing building, and with Owner's occupancy of completed
new addition.
JOB CONDITIONS:
Occupancy: Owner will be continuously occupying areas of the
building (shop and party room) immediately adjacent to areas of
selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in
manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal
operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner
�..► of demolition activities which will severely impact Owner's
normal operations.
Partial Demolition and Removal: Items indicated to be removed
r but of salvable value to Contractor may be removed from structure
as work progresses. Transport salvaged items from site as they
are removed.
Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be
permitted.
Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of
protection as required to protect Owner's personnel and
general public from injury due to selective demolition work.
92148
r-
Provide protective measures as required to provide free and
safe passage of Owner's personnel and,general public to and
from occupied portions of building.
Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support
to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or
element to be demolished, and adjacent facilities or work to
remain.
Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain
in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.
Provide floors with suitable coverings when necessary.
02070 - 2
r-
Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions
where required to separate areas where noisy or extensive
dirt or dust operations are performed. Equip partitions
with dustproof doors and security locks if required.
Provide temporary weather protection during interval between
demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior
surfaces, and installation of new construction to insure
that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or
interior areas of existing building.
Remove protections at completion of work.
Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities
by demolition work at no cost to Owner.
Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris
removal in a manner to ensure minimum interference with roads,
streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.
Do not close, block or otherwise obstruct streets, walks or
other occupied or used facilities without written permission
from authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate
routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required
by governing regulations.
Explosives: Use of explosives will not be permitted.
Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to
remain, keep in service, and protect against damage during
demolition operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSPECTION•
(Not Applicable).
Prior to commencement of selective demolition work, inspect areas
in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions
to structure surfaces, equipment or to surrounding properties
which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from selective
demolition work; file with Owner's Representative prior to
starting work.
PREPARATION•
Provide interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or support to
prevent movement, settlement or collapse of structures to be
demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.
Cease operations and notify the Owner's Representative
immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered.
92148 02070 - 3
r
r Take precautions to support structure until determination is
y made for continuing operations.
r" Cover and protect furniture, equipment and fixtures to remain
from soiling or damage when demolition work is performed in rooms
or areas from which such items have not been removed.
Locate, identify, stub off and disconnect utility services that
are not indicated to remain.
Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain
continuity of service to occupied areas of building.
Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shut-
down -of service is necessary during change -over.
DEMOLITION•
Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use
such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings
in accordance with demolition schedule and governing regulations.
r�
Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Cut
concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to
remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not
use power -driven impact tools where existing concrete is to
remain.
Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and
promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on
supporting walls, floors or framing.
Provide services for effective air and water pollution
controls as required by local authorities having
jurisdiction.
Completely remove concrete diving stands and base. Remove
all other concrete items to a depth of not less than 12"
below existing surface.
Completely fill below -grade areas and voids resulting from
demolition work. Provide and compact new fill in accordance
with Division 2 requirements.
If unanticipated mechanical, electrical or structural elements
which conflict with intended function or design are encountered,
investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict.
Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate
detail. Pending receipt of directive from Owner's Representative
rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue
overall job progress without delay.
92148
02070 - 4
=SALVAGE MATERIALS:
Salvage Items: All items not indicated on Drawings to be reused
or relocated, shall be stockpiled or otherwise made accessible to
the Owner prior to removal. The Owner shall retain the option to
claim any and all such items. Any items claimed shall be
stockpiled or otherwise made accessible to the Owner who will
transport same to his warehouse for storage. All items not
claimed by the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor
and shall be removed from the site.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS:
Remove debris, rubbish and other materials `resulting from
demolition operations from building site. Transport and legally
dispose of materials off site.
Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project
site.
CLEAN-UP AND REPAIR:
Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment and
demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave
interior areas broom clean.
Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return
structures and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to
commencement of selective demolition work. Repair adjacent
construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective
demolition work.
END OF SECTION 02070
92148 1 02070 - 5
SECTION 02110 - SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
�- The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of site clearing is shown on drawings.
Site clearing includes, but is not limited to:
r„ Topsoil stripping.
Removal of trees.
Rlearing and grubbing.
Removing above -grade improvements.
Removing below -grade improvements.
JOB CONDITIONS•
Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum
interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent
occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets,
walks or other occupied or used facilities without permission
from authorities having jurisdiction.
Protection of Existing Improvements: Provide protections
necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to
remain in place.
Protect improvements on adjoining properties and on Owner's
property.
Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as
acceptable to parties having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not applicable to work of this section.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SITE CLEARING•
General: Remove trees paving, shrubs, grass and other
vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with
installation of new construction. Remove such items elsewhere
on site or premises as specifically indicated.
92148 02110 1
r
Topsoil: Topsoil is defined as: friable clay loam -surface soil
found in a depth of not less than 411. Satisfactory topsoil is
reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects
over 2" in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other
objectionable material.
Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to
prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other
objectionable material.
Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil same as waste material,
herein specified.
Clearing and Grubbing: Clear areas of new construction of trees,
shrubs and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be
left standing.
Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding
through ground surface.
Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with
satisfactory soil material, unless further excavation or
earthwork is indicated.
Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding
6" loose depth, and thoroughly compact to a'density
equal to adjacent original ground. —
Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above -grade and below -
grade improvements necessary to permit construction, and other _
work as indicated.
Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits
may be shown on mechanical or electrical drawings, and is
included under work of those sections. Removal of abandoned
underground piping or conduit interfering with construction is
included under this section.
DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS:
Burning on Owner's Property: Burning is not permitted on owner's
property.
Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials and
unsuitable and excess topsoil from Owner's property and dispose
of off site in a legal manner.
END OF SECTION 02110
92148 02110 - 2
r
SECTION 02200 - EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS•
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification
sections, apply to work of this section.'
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of earthwork is shown on drawings.
Preparation of subgrade for building slabs, walks, and other
exterior concrete flatwork is included as part of this work.
Backfilling of trenches within building and/or swimming pool lines
is included as part of this work.
OUALITY ASSURANCE•
Codes and Standards: Perform excavation work in compliance with
applicable requirements of - governing `authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing and Inspection Service: Employ, at Contractor's expense,
testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service
for quality control testing during earthwork operations. The
testing laboratory shall comply with the requirements of ASTM
D3740, Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection
of Soil or Rock Used In Engineering Design and Construction.
SUBMITTALS:
Test Reports: Submit following reports directly to the Engineer
from the testing services, with copies to the Contractor.
Test reports on existing or borrow material for each type of soil
encountered.
Atterberg Limits
Linear Shrinkage
Optimum moisture/maximum dry density curve
Field density test reports of subgrades and compacted fills.
Reports shall indicate soil type or change of soil if any other is
used.
02200 - 1
7
JOB CONDITIONS:
Site Information: A subsurface soils investigation at the site has
not been performed. Test borings and other exploratory operations
may be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in areas
of work. If utilities are to remain in place, provide adequate
means of protection during earthwork operations.
Should uncharted, or incorrectly charted, piping or other utilities
be encountered during excavation, consult utility owner immediately
for directions. Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in
keeping respective services and facilities in operation. Repair
damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner.
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving facilities occupied and
used by Owner or others, except when permitted in writing by the
Engineer and then only after acceptable temporary utility services
have been provided.
Use of Explosives: The use of explosives is not permitted.
Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations
occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights.
Operate warning lights as recommended by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, and other facilities from
damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout
and other hazards created by earthwork operations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SOIL MATERIALS:
Satisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, GC, SC, CL, SM,
SW and SP.
Unsatisfactory soil materials are defined as those complying with
ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups CH, ML, MH, OL, OH, and PT.
Topsoil shall be -fertile, natural soil of loamy character, free of
clay lumps, stones and debris
Backfill and Fill Materials: Satisfactory soil materials free of
clay, rock or gravel larger than 2" in any dimension, debris,
waste, frozen materials, vegetable and other deleterious matter.
Fill materials shall have a liquid limit between 4 and 30 and the
plasticity index shall be between 4 and 12.
02200 - 2
EXCAVATION•
Excavation consists of removal and disposal of material encountered
when establishing required finish grade elevations.
Earth excavation includes removal and disposal of .obstructions
visible on ground surface, underground structures and utilities
indicated to be demolished and removed, material of any
classification indicated in data on subsurface conditions, and
other materials encountered that are not classified as unauthorized
excavation.
Unauthorized excavation consists of removal of materials beyond
indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific
direction of the Engineer. Unauthorized excavation, as well as
remedial work directed by the Engineer, shall be at Contractor's
expense.
Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill
unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of
footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top
elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used to bring elevations to
proper position, when acceptable to the Engineer.
Elsewhere, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as
specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required
subgrade elevations, notify the Engineer who will make an
inspection of conditions.
If unsuitable bearing materials are encountered at required
subgrade elevations, carry excavations deeper and replace excavated
material as directed by the Engineer.
Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will
be paid on basis of contract conditions relative to changes in
work.
Stability of Excavations
Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and
ordinances having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is
not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material
excavated.
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until
completion of backfilling.
02200 - 3
t
Shoring and Bracing: Where required, provide materials for shoring
and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers and
cross -braces, in good serviceable condition.
Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply
with local codes and authorities having jurisdiction.
Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time
period excavations will be open. Carry down shoring and bracing as
excavation progresses. _
Sheet Piling: Where rtz aired provide permanent steel sheet piling
or pressure creosoted timber sheet piling wherever subsequent —
removal of sheet piling might permit lateral movement of soil under
adjacent structures. Cut off -tops as required and leave
permanently in place
Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water
from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and
surrounding area. _
Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to
prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and —
soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations.
Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and
discharge liz.es, and other dewatering system components necessary
to convey water away from excavations.
Convey water removed from excavations and rain water to collecting
or run-off areas. Establish and maintain temporary drainage
ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits for each
structure. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage
ditches.
Material Storacre: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where
directed, until required for backfill or fill. Place, grade and
shape stockpiles for proper drainage.
Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations.
Dispose of excess soil material and waste materials as herein
specified.
Excavation for Structures:
Conform to elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of
- plus or minus 0.10 foot, and extending a sufficient distance from
footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete
formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for
inspection. .
02200 4
P'R
In excavating for footings and foundations, take care not to
disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just
before concrete reinforcement is placed. Trim bottoms to required
lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.
Excavation for Trenches:
Dig trenches to the uniform width required for particular item to
be installed, sufficiently wide to provide ample working room.
Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required. Carry depth of
trenches for piping to establish indicated flow lines and invert
elevations. Beyond building perimeter, keep bottoms of trenches
sufficiently below finish grade to avoid freeze -ups.
�,. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation 6" below required
elevation and backfill with a 6" layer of crushed stone or gravel
prior to installation of pipe.
Grade bottoms of trenches as indicated, notching under pipe bells
to provide solid bearing for entire body of pipe.
Backfill trenches with concrete where trench excavations pass
within 18" of column or wall footings and which are carried below
bottom of such footings, or which pass under wall footings. Place
concrete to level of bottom of adjacent footings.
Concrete is specified in Division 3.
Do not backf ill trenches until tests and inspections have been made
and backfilling authorized by the Engineer. Use care in
backfilling to avoid damage or displacement of pipe systems.
Cold weather Protection: Protect excavation bottoms against
freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F. (1
degree C.)
COMPACTION:
General: Control soil compaction during construction providing
minimum percentage of density specified for each area
classification.
Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not
less than the following percentages of maximum dry density for
soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship
determined in accordance with ASTM D 698 (Standard Proctor); and
not less than the following percentages of relative density,
determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not
exhibit a well-defined moisture -density relationship.
02200 - 5
r
Structures: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of backfill
or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90% relative dry
density.
Building Slabs: Compact top 12" of subgrade and each layer of
backfill or fill material at 95% maximum dry density or 90%
relative dry density.
Lawn or Unpaved Areas_: Compact top 6" of subgrade and each layer
of backfill or fill material at 90% maximum dry density.
Walkways and other Exterior Flatwork: Compact top 6" of subgrade
and each layer of backfill or fill materials at 95% maximum dry
density or 90% relative dry density.
Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be
moisture conditioned before compaction,, uniformly apply water to
surface of subgrade, or layer of soil material, to prevent free
water appearing on surface during or subsequent to compaction
operations.
Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is
too wet to permit compaction to specified density.
Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to permit
compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry: Assist
drying by discing, harrowing or pulverizing until moisture content
is reduced to a satisfactory value.
BACKFILL AND FILL•
General: Place acceptable soil material in layers to required
subgrade elevations, for each area classification listed below.
In excavations, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under grassed areas, use satisfactory excavated or borrow material.
Under walks and flatwork, use satisfactory excavated or borrow
material, or combination of both.
Under building slabs, use satisfactory borrow material.
Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits,
completion of the following:
Inspection, testing, approval, and recording
underground utilities.
02200 6
but not until
locations of
rt
r"
Removal of concrete formwork.
Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids with
satisfactory materials. Cut off temporary sheet piling driven
below bottom of structures and remove in manner to prevent
settlement of the structure or utilities, or leave in place if
required.
Removal of trash and debris.
C Permanent or temporary horizontal bracing is in place on
horizontally supported walls.
Ground Surface Preparation
Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials,
7 obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior
to placement of fills. Plow, strip, or break-up so that fill
material will bond with existing surface.
rwhen existing ground surface has a density less than that specified
under "Compaction" for particular area classification, break up
�. ground surface, pulverize, moisture -condition to optimum moisture
content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum
density.
Placement and Compaction:
Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 811 in
Flo loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,
and not more than 4" in loose depth for material compacted by
hand -operated tampers.
Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to
provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required
percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each
area classification. Do not place backfill or fill material on
surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.
Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, to
required elevations. Take care to prevent wedging action of
backfill against structures by carrying material uniformly around
structure to approximately same elevation in each lift.
GRADING•
General: Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this
section, including adjacent transition areas. smooth finished
surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or
slopes between points where elevations are shown, or between such
points and existing grades.
02200 - 7
Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building
lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding.
Finish surfaces free from irregular surface changes, and as
follows:
Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Finish areas to receive topsoil to within
not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade
elevations.
Walks and Flatwork: Shape surface of areas under walks and other
exterior flatwork to line, grade and cross-section, with finish
surface not more than 0.10 foot above or below required subgrade
elevation.
Grading Surface of Fill Under Slabs: Grade smooth and even, free
of voids, compacted as specified, and to required elevation.
Provide final grades within a tolerance of 1/2" when tested with a
10 foot straightedge.
Compaction; After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth
and percentage of maximum density for each area classification.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
Quality Control Testing During Construction
Allow testing service to inspect and approve subgrades and fill
layers before further construction work is performed.
Perform field density tests in accordance with.ASTM D 1556 (Sand
Cone Method) or ASTM D 2167 (Rubber Balloon Method), or ASTM D
2922, (Nuclear Gauge Method) as applicable.
Flatwork and Building Slab Subgrade:
Make at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2000 sq.
ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case less than 3
tests. In each compacted fill layer, make one field density test
for every 2000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case less than 3 tests. Subsequent layers shall be
placed only after the previous compacted layer has been tested and
approved by the testing laboratory and the. -Engineer.
Foundation Wall Backfill: Take at least 2 field density tests, at
locations and elevations as directed.
If, in opinion of the Engineer, based on testing service reports
and inspection, subgrade or fills which have been placed are below
specified density, provide additional compaction and testing at no
additional expense.
02200 - 8
I
MAINTENANCE•
Protection of Graded Areas:
Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. Keep free of
trash and debris.
Repair and re-establish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas
to specified tolerances.
Reconditioning Compacted Areas: Where completed compacted areas
are disturbed by subsequent construction operations or adverse
weather, scarify surface, re -shape, and compact to required density
prior to further construction.
DISPOSAL OF EXCESS AND WASTE MATERIALS
Removal from Owner's Property:
Remove waste materials, including unacceptable excavated material,
trash and debris, and dispose of it off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION 02200
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
02200 - 9
SECTION 03300 - CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions . and other Division 1 specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
The extent of concrete work is shown.on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following
codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent
requirements are shown or specified:
ACI 301 ".Specifications for Structural Concrete for
Buildings".
ACI 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing,
Transporting and Placing Concrete".
ACI 311 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Inspection".
ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete".
ACI 347 "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork".
MSP-1-90 Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Manual of
Standard Practice".
Workmanship: The Contractor is responsible for correction of
concrete work which does not conform to the specified requirements,
including strength, tolerances and finishes. Correct deficient
concrete as directed by the Engineer.
Design and Testing:
The Contractor shall bear all expenses in connection with securing
proper laboratory designed mixes. Mixes proposed for use in this
project shall be tested by means of actual cylinder breaks, with _
all information being reported to the Engineer. A proven,
established, mix from an acceptable ready -mix plant may be used.
Provide a minimum of 5 recent different compression test reports
for the proposed mix.
Job site cylinders shall be taken when the Engineer so directs. The
Contractor shall notify the testing laboratory when test cylinders are to be taken. The laboratory shall come to the site and take
the concrete cylinders, and be responsible for their care and
handling including breaking of same at laboratory.
03300 1
i
The laboratory shall be an independent testing laboratory
designated by the Engineer and the Owner.
All expense for taking and testing concrete cylinders shall be
borne by the Contractor.
Test results shall be furnished to the Engineer and the Contractor.
Any concrete not meeting strength requirements shall be further
r" tested. If further tests indicate concrete will ultimately never
meet strength requirements, the understrength concrete will be
replaced with new as directed by the Engineer.
SUBMITTALS•
Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with
application and installation instructions for proprietary materials
and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories,
admixtures, patching compounds,. joint systems, and others as
requested by the Engineer.
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
placement of concrete reinforcement. Comply with the ACI 315
"Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete
Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of
bent bars, arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special
reinforcement required at openings through concrete structures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
FORM MATERIALS•
Forms for Exposed Finish Concrete: Unless otherwise shown or
specified, construct all formwork for exposed concrete surfaces
with plywood, metal, metalframed plywood -faced or other acceptable
panel -type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth,
exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize
number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on the
Drawings. Provide form material with sufficient thickness to
withstand pressure of newly -placed concrete without bow or
deflection. Forms used for this class of concrete shall be new or
"good -as -new".
Use plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B
(Concrete Form) Plywood" Class I, Exterior Grade or better,
mill -oiled and edgesealed, with each piece bearing legible
trademark of an approved inspection agency, unless otherwise
acceptable to the Engineer.
03300 - 2
Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which
will be unexposed in finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal
or other acceptable material. Provide lumber_ dressed on at least
2 edges and one side for tight fit.
REINFORCING MATERIALS: —
Reinforcincr Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, except No. 3 ties and
stirrups may be Grade 40.
Dowels for load transfer in slabs shall be plain steel bars
conforming to ASTM A 6751 Grade 80'or ASTM A 499.
Supports for Reinforcement:
Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs,
spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening
reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar
type supports complying with CRSI, unless otherwise specified.
Wood, brick and other devices will not be acceptable.
For slabs -on -grade, use supports with sand plates for horizontal
runners where wetted base materials will not support chair legs.
CONCRETE MATERIALS:
Portland Cement:
ASTM C 150, Type I, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
Use only one brand of cement throughout the project, unless
otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
Fine Agctrecrate
Clean, sharp, natural sand free from loam, clay, lumps or other
deleterious substances.
Dune sand, bank -run sand and manufactured sand are not acceptable.
Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33. Clean, uncoated, processed aggregate
containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter as follows:
Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.
Washed gravel, either natural or crushed. Use of pit or bank -run
gravel is not permitted.'
Provide aggregate from a single source for all exposed concrete.
03300 - 3
aximum Aciarectate Size:
Not larger than one -fifth of the narrowest dimension between sides
of forms, one-third of the depth of slabs, nor three -fourths of the
minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or
bundles or bars.
These limitations. may be waived if, in the judgment of the
Engineer, workability and methods of consolidation are such that
concrete can be placed without honeycomb or voids.
Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type C or Type F.
Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable.
Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, containing not more
than 0.1% chloride ions.
Set -Control Admixtures: ASTM C 494, as follows:
Type B, Retarding.
Type C, Accelerating.
Type D, Water -reducing and Retarding.
Type E, Water -reducing and Accelerating.
Calcium chloride will not be permitted in concrete, unless
otherwise authorized in writing by Engineer.
RELATED MATERIALS:
Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers: Premolded cane fiber saturated
with asphalt. Unless indicated otherwise, 1/2" thickness by depth
of slab.
Joint Sealing Compound: See Division 7 sections.
Concrete Curing Hardening and Dustproofing Compound: Equal to
Sonosil as manufactuured by Sonneborn Building Products.
1. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES:
Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete in
accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM C 94. Use an
independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for
r., preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility
f shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing
unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.
03300 - 4
Prepare design mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field
experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project
for each class of concrete required, complying with ACI 211.1.
Laboratory Trial Batches: When laboratory trial batches are used
to select concrete proportions, prepare test specimens in
accordance with ASTM C 192 and conduct strength tests in accordance
with ASTM C 39, specified in ACI 301. Establish a curve showing
relationship between water -cement ratio (or cement content) and
compressive strength, with at least 3 points representing batches
which produce strengths above and below that required. Use not
less than 3 speciinens tested at 28 days, or an earlier age when
acceptable to the Engineer, to establish each point on the curve.
Field Experience Method: When field experience methods are used to
select concrete proportions, establish proportions as specified in
ACI 301. Strength data for establishing standard deviation will be
considered suitable if the concrete production facility has
certified records consisting of at least 30 consecutive tests in
one group or the statistical average for 2 groups totaling 30 or
more tests, representing similar materials and project conditions.
If standard deviation exceeds 600 psi or if no suitable records are
available, select proportions to produce an average strength of at
least 1200 psi greater than the required compressive strength of
concrete.
After sufficient experience and test data become available from the
job, using ACI 214 methods of evaluation, the standard deviation
may be reduced when the probable frequency of an average of 3
consecutive tests below required compressive strength will not
exceed 1 in 100.
Submit written reports to the Engineer of each proposed mix for
each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do
not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed by the
Engineer.
Design mixes to provide normal weight concrete with the following
properties, as indicated on the Drawings and schedules:
3000 psi 28-day compressive strength;- W/C ratio, 0.58 maximum
(non -air -entrained), 0.46 maximum (air -entrained)..
Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be
requested by the Contractor when characteristics of materials, job
conditions, weather, tests results, or other circumstances warrant;
at no additional cost to the Owner and as accepted by the Engineer.
Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results
must be submitted to and accepted by the Engineer before using in
the work.
03300 - 5
a
ADMIXTURES•
Use water -reducing admixture in concrete as required for placement
and workability.
Use non -chloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at
ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F.
Use air -entrained admixture in exterior exposed concrete, unless
otherwise indicated. Add air -entraining admixture at the
manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point
of placement having air content within the following limits:
5.54; with 11/2" maximum aggregate
6.0% with 111maximum aggregate
r 6.0% with 3/4" maximum aggregate
1 7.0% with 1/2" maximum aggregate
Use admixture for water -reducing and set -control in strict
compliance with the manufacturer's directions.
Use amounts of admixtures as recommended by the manufacturer for
�.. climatic conditions prevailing at the time of placing. Adjust
quantities and types of admixtures as required to maintain quality
control.
SLUMP LIMITS•
Proportion and design mixes to result in concrete slump at the
point of placement as follows:
Sloping Surfaces: Not more than 311.
Reinforced Foundation Systems: Not less than 1" and not more than
311.
All Other Concrete: Not more than 411.
CONCRETE MIXING:
Ready -Mix Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ANSI/ASTM C
94, and as herein specified.
Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to
the batch for material with insufficient slump. Addition of water
to the batch will not be permitted.
During hot weather, or under conditions contributing to rapid
setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in
ANSI/ASTM C 94 may be required.
03300 - 6
When the air temperature is between 85 degrees F. and 90 degrees
F., reduce the mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75
minutes, and when -the air temperature is above 90 degrees F.,
reduce the mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
FORMS:
Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support
vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads
can be supported by the concrete structure. Construct formwork so
concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape,
alignment, elevation and position.
Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or
damage to, cast -in -place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
Forms shall not leak cement paste.
Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying
against the concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking
plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide _
top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place
concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming
keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and
for easy removal.
Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is
inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete —
placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary
openings and set tightly to form to prevent loss of concrete
mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous
locations.
Chamfer exposed corners and edges as shown, using wood, metal, PVC
or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines
and tight edge joints.
Form Ties: Factory -fabricated, adjustable -length, removable or
snapoff metal form ties, designated to prevent form deflection, and
to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal.
Unless otherwise shown, provide ties so portion remaining within "-
concrete after removal is at least l 1/2" inside concrete. Unless
otherwise shown, provide form ties which will not leave holes
larger than i" diameter in concrete surface.
Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork
to accommodate work for other trades. Determine size and location _
of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items.
Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
03300 - 7
i
N
Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent
surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt or
other debris just before concrete is placed. Retighten forms after
concrete placement if required to eliminate mortar leaks.
PLACING REINFORCING:
Comply with the specified codes and standards, and Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing
Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement
placement and supports, and as herein specified.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and
other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.
Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement- against
displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement
operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs,
runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required..
r
Place reinforcement to obtain at least the minimum coverages for
concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar
supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete
placement opera -ions. Set wire ties so ends are directed into
concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.
I
JOINTS•
Construction Joints:
Locate and install construction joints, which are not shown on the
Drawings, so as not to impair the strength and appearance of the
structure, as acceptable to the Engineer.
Provide keyways at least 1 1/2" deep in all construction joints in
walls, slabs and between walls and footings; acceptable bulkheads
designed for this purpose may be used for slabs.
Place construction joints perpendicular to the main reinforcement.
Continue all reinforcement across construction joints.
Control Joints in Slabs -on -Ground:
Construct control joints in slabs -on -ground to form panels or
patterns as shown or directed. Form edge of pours with wood forms
as detailed on the Drawings.
Isolation Joints in Slabs -on -Ground: Construct isolation joints in
slabs on ground at all points of contact between slabs on ground
and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls,
grade beams and elsewhere as indicated.
03300 - 8
INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS:
General: Set and build into the work anchorage devices and other
embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or
supported by, cast -in -place concrete. Use setting drawings,
diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of the
items to be attached thereto.
Edge Forms and Screed Strips- for Slabs: Set edge forms or —
bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain the
required elevations and contours in the finished slab surface.
Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support the types
of screed required. Align the concrete surface to the elevation of the screed strips by the use of strike -off templates or accepted
compacting type screeds.
PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES:
Coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form -coating compound
before reinforcement is placed. Provide commercial formulation
form -coating compounds that will not bond with, stain nor adversely
affect concrete surfaces, and will not impair subsequent treatment
of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds.
Thin form -coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and
in amount, and under conditions of the form -coating compound
manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form -coating
material to accumulate in the forms or to come into contact with
concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed.
Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
CONCRETE PLACEMENT:
General:
Comply with ACI 304, and as herein specified.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that
no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened
sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness
within the section. If a section cannot be placed continuously,
provide construction joints as herein specified.
Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to
avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing.
Pre -Placement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and
complete the formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to
be embedded or cast -in. Notify other crafts to permit the
installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting
such work, as required. Thoroughly wet wood forms innediately
03300 - 9
i
before placing concrete, as required where form coatings are not
used.
Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal
layers not deeper than 180 and in a manner to avoid inclined
construction joints.
Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment
supplemented by hand -spading, rodding or tamping. Use vibrators
designed to operate with vibratory element submerged in concrete,
maintaining a speed of not less than 6000 impulses per minute.
Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside of forms. Insert
and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not
farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Do not
insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to
set. At each insertion, limit the duration of vibration to the
time necessary to consolidate the concrete and complete embedment
of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing
segregation of the mix.
Placing Concrete Slabs:
Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation,
within the limits of construction joints, until the placing of a
panel or section is completed. Consolidate concrete during placing
operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around
reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.
Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straightedge and
strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface,
leaving it free of humps or hollows. Do not sprinkle water on the
plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to
beginning finishing operations.
Maintain reinforcing in the proper position during concrete
placement operations.
Cold Weather Placing:
Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength
which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306 and as herein specified.
When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40
degrees F., uniformly heat all water and aggregate before mixing as
required to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than
50 degrees F., and not more than 80 degrees F., at point of
placement.
03300 - 10
Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do
not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing
frozen materials.
Do not use calcium chloride, salt and other materials containing
antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise
accepted in mix designs.
Hot Weather Placing:
When hot weather conditions exist that could seriously impair the
quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with
ACI 305 and as herein specified. --
Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at
time of placement below 90 degrees F. Mixing water may be chilled,
or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature
provided the water equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total
amount of mixing.
Cover reinforcing steel with water -soaked burlap if it becomes too
hot, so that the steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air
temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Wet form
thoroughly before placing concrete.
Do not use retarding admixtures unless otherwise accepted in ;six
designs.
FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES:
Standard Rough Form Finish: For formed concrete surfaces not
exposed -to -view in the finish work or by other construction, unless
otherwise shown or specified. This is the concrete surface having
the texture imparted by the form facing material used, with
defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and fins and
other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down with wood
blocks.
Standard Smooth Finish: For formed concrete surfaces
exposed -to -view, or that are to be covered with a coating material —
applied directly to the concrete or a covering material bonded to
the concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or
other similar system. This is• the as -cast concrete surface as
obtained with the form facing material, with defective areas
repaired and patched as specified, and fins and other projections
on the surface completely removed and smoothed.
Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets
and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed
surfaces, strike -off smooth and finish with a texture matching
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of
formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless
03300 - 11
r
t
i
otherwise shown.
MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES:
f
E Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that
are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter
specified.
After screeding and consolidating concrete slabs, do not work
r" surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface
water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently
to permit operation of power -driven floats or both. Consolidate
r surface with power -driven floats, or by hand floating if area is
small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface
plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4" in 10 feet when tested with
a 10 foot straightedge. Cut down high spots and fill low spots.
r Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling,
refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
Trowel Finish:
Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be
exposed -to -view, unless otherwise shown, and slab surfaces that are
to be covered with paint or other thinfilm finish coating system.
After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a
power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces
a ringing sound as trowel is moved over the surface. Consolidate
concrete surface by final hand troweling operation, free of trowel
marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane
tolerance not exceeding 1/811 in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot
straightedge. Grind smooth surface defects which would telegraph
through applied floor covering system.
Non -Slip Broom Finish:
Apply non -slip broom finish to exterior concrete flatwork, and
elsewhere as shown on the Drawings or in schedules.
Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete
surface by brooming perpendicular to main traffic route.
Coordinate required final finish with the Engineer before
application.
CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION:
General:
Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive
cold or hot temperature.
03300 - 12
Start curing application as soon as free water has disappeared from
concrete surface after placing and finishing, and whn surface will
bear walking workmen or footboards with damage.
Curing Method: Perform curing of concrete by applying combination
curing hardening, and dustproofing compound.
Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including
swimming pool gutters and other similar surfaces by moist curing
with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are
removed.
Curing Unformed Surfaces: Apply Sonosil or equal, by brush
squeegee, hand or power spray in two coats allowing 1/2 to 1 hour
drying time per coat. See manufacturers directions.
REMOVAL OF FORMS:
Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,
walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after
cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees F. for 24 hours
after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to
not be damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and
protection operations are maintained.
Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as. beam soffits,
joists, slabs and other structural elements, may not be removed in
less than 14 days and until concrete has attained design minimum
compressive strength at 28-days. Determine potential compressive
strength of inplace concrete by testing field -cured specimens
representative of concrete location or members.
Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement, only if
shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit
removal of form facing material without loosening or disturbing
shores and supports.
RE -USE OF FORMS•
Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used in the work.
Split, frayed, delaminated or otherwise damaged form facing
material will not be acceptable. Apply new form coating compound
material to concrete contact form surfaces as specified for new
formwork. _
When forms are intended for successive concrete placement,
thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten
forms to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets.
Do not use "patched" forms for exposed concrete surfaces, except as
acceptable to the Engineer. _
03300 -"13
i
t
MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS:
Filling -In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures
for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or
directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and
cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in -place
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown
or required to complete work.
r Reinforced Masonry: Provide concrete grout for reinforced masonry
lintels and bond beams where indicated on the Drawings and as
scheduled. Grout shall comply with ASTM C476. Maintain accurate
r location of reinforcing steel during concrete placement.
CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS:
Patching Defective Areas:
Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately
after removal of forms, but only when acceptable to the Engineer.
Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension,
and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid. concrete but,
in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts
perpendicular to the concrete surface. Before placing cement
mortar or proprietary patching compound, thoroughly clean, dampen
with water and brush -coat the area to be patched with neat cement
grout, or proprietary bonding agent.
For exposed -to -view surfaces, blend white portland cement and
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will
match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous
location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with
patching. Compact mortar in place and strike -off slightly higher
than surrounding surface.
Repair of Formed Surfaces:
Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Engineer. Surface
defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks,
spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other
projections on surface; and stains and other discolorations that
cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with
dry pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with
bonding agent.
Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain
defects that adversely affect the durability of the concrete. If
defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.
03300 - 14
r
Repair of Unformed Surfaces:
Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness
and to verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each
surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein
specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of
slope, in addition to smoothness, using a template having required
slope.
Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects which
adversely affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such,
include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate
to reinforcement or completely through non -reinforced sections
regardless of width, spalling, pop -outs, honeycomb, rock pockets,
and other objectionable conditions.
Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete
has cured at least 14 days.
Correct low areas `in unformed surfaces during, or immediately after
completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas
and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend
into adjacent concrete. Proprietary patching compounds may be used
when acceptable to the Engineer.
Repair defective areas except random cracks and single holes not
exceeding l" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh
concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean,
square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4"
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with _
patching concrete, and brush with a neat cement grout coating or
concrete bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to
provide concrete of the same type or class as original concrete. -
Place, compact and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete.
Cure in the same manner as adjacent concrete.
Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over l" in
diameter by dry -pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out
holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt and loose
particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and brush with neat
cement grout coating or concrete bonding agent. Mix dry -pack,
consisting of one part portland cement to 2 1/2 parts fine
aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve; using only enough water as �-
required for handling and placing. Compact dry -pack mixture in
place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area
continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
Use epoxy -based mortar for structural repairs, where directed by
the Engineer.
Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to
acceptance of the Engineer.
03300 - 15
{
r..
QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION:
The Contractor will employ a testing laboratory to perform all
other tests and to submit test reports.
Sampling and testing for quality control during the placement of
concrete may include the following, as directed by the Engineer.
Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to
comply with ASTM C 94.
Slump: One test for each set of compressive strength test
specimens taken at point of discharge.
Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight
concrete; ASTM C 231 pressure for normal weight concrete; one for
each set of compressive strength test specimens.
Concrete Temperature: Test hourly when air temperature is 40
degrees F. and below, and when 80 degrees F. and above; and each
time a set of compression test specimens made.
Comnression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard
cylinders for each compressive strength test, unless otherwise
directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory cured test
specimens except when field -cure test specimens are required.
Compressive Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each 100 cu.
yds. or fraction thereof, of each concrete class placed in any one
day or for each 5000 sq. ft. of surface area placed; 1 specimen
tested at 7 days for information only, 2 specimens tested at 28
days, and 1 specimen retained in reserve for later testing if
required. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the
strengths of the two specimens tested at 28 days.
When the frequency of testing will provide less than 5 strength
tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least
5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than 5 are
used.
When the total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than
50 cu. yds., the strength test may be waived by the Engineer if, in
his judgment, adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is
provided.
When the strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85k of
Flo companion laboratory -cured cylinders, evaluate current operations
and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the
in -place concrete.
03300 - 16
Test results will be reported in writing to the Engineer and the
Contractor on the same day that tests are made. Reports of
compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification
name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete
testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete
batch in the structure, design compressive strength at 28 days,
concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking
strength and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.
Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests
of in -place concrete when test results indicate the specified
concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained
in the structure, as directed by the Engineer. The testing service
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored
cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests conducted, and any
other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable
concrete is verified.
END OF SECTION 03300
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc
03300 - 17
P`
i
7 SECTION 03721 - REPAIR MORTAR
r. PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract including General
Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY:
This Section specifies a one -component, thixotropic, rheoplastic, cement
based, fiber reinforced, shrinkage -compensated, sulfate resistant
structural repair mortar.
This Product is designed for repairing concrete or masonry structures and
can be applied by low-pressure spraying or hand -troweling.
REFERENCES:
ASTM C 109-90 Test method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars - Modified.
ASTM A 185-85 Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for
Concrete Reinforcement.
ASTM C 348-91 Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic Cement
Mortars.
I ASTM C 469-87 Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression.
ASTM C 666-91 Test Method for Resistance of Concrete to Rapid
Freezing and Thawing.
ASTM C 806-87 Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Expansive
Cement Mortar.
ASTM C 882-87 Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy Resin Systems
7 Used with Concrete -Modified.
ASTM C 1012-89 Test Method for Length of Change of Hydraulic Cement
r^� Mortars Exposed to a Sulfate Solution - Modified.
ASTM C 1202-91 Electrical Indication of Resistance to Chloride Ion
Penetration.
System Performance Requirements:
Provide repair mortar that when cured produces the following properties:
Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109): Minimum, 1-day 4000 psi (31.0 MPa);
28-day 10,000 psi (69 MPa).
Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348): Minimum, 1-day 700 psi (4.8 MPa); 28-day
1250 psi (8.6 MPa).
7 03721 - 1
r
Slant Shear Bond Strength (ASTM C 882-modified): Minimum, 1-day 2000 psi
(13.8 MPa); 28-day 3000 psi (20.7 MPa).
Permeability (ASTM C 1202): 1000 Coulombs Maximum.
Freeze -Thaw Resistance (ASTM C 666-300 cycles): minimum RDF 85W.
Sulfate Resistance (ASTM C 11012-15 weeks): 0.1 expansion (maximum
difference between control bars in water and test bars).
Restrained Expansion (ASTM C 806): Minimum 0.03W at 7 days, Maximum 0.1%-
at 28 days. Obtain 90t of maximum expansion within 24 hours.
Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM C 469): 3.1 million psi minimum, 4.8 million
psi maximum.
Proiect Conditions:
Weather Condition.: Apply repair mortar only when ambient and surface
temperatures are 500 F (100 C) and rising. Do not make the repair if the
ambient temperature is expected to fall below 400 F (50 C) within 24
hours after placement. Do not apply repair mortar when ambient and
surface temperatures are 1000 F (380 C) and above.
Follow manufacturer's recommendations regarding additional installation
information (hot weather -drying conditions, or cold weather
installation).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Materials:
Repair Mortar: "EMACO S88-CA" by Master Builders, Inc., a blend of -'
portland cement, silica fume, specially graded aggregates, synthetic
fibers, and set -control admixtures including shrinkage compensating
additives.
Water: Drinkable.
"Confilm", evaporation reducer and finishing aid, by Master Builders,
Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Surface Preparation:
Mechanically remove unsound concrete to the limits indicated on the
Drawings.
Remove a minimum of 1.4" (6mm) of existing concrete facing and continue
removal as required to expose sound aggregate.. Substrate should have a
minimum amplitude of 1/411. Limit the size of chipping hammers to 15lbs.
to reduce micro fractures.
03721 - 2
.kft
Saw -cut perimeter of the area to be repaired to a minimum depth of 1/4"
(6 mm). Do not cut existing steel reinforcement.
Where reinforcing steel with active corrosion is encountered, comply with
the following:
Abrasive blast reinforcing steel to remove rust, scale and
contaminants to achieve a white metal finish.
If half of the diameter of the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out
behind the reinforcing to 3/4" (19 mm) minimum depth.
l
Splice new reinforcing steel to existing steel where corrosion has
„, depleted the cross-section area by 25t, as directed by the Engineer.
r
f.
Thoroughly clean the roughened surface and exposed reinforcement of rust,
dirt, loose chips, and dust using high pressure water. Maintain
substrate in a saturated, surface dry condition.
Mixing:
Comply with mortar manufacturer's recommendations for water quantity and
mixing procedures.
Applications:
Maintain substrate in a saturated, surface dry condition.
For hand applications, a bond slurry coat is required.
Apply repair mortar by low-pressure wet spraying or hand -troweling on
vertical surfaces in depths ranging from 3/8" (10 mm) to 2" (50 mm).
Vertical Applications: Repair mortar can be spray -applied for vertical
applications up to 2" (50 mm) depth in one lift.
Multiple Passes: Place succeeding lifts after repair mortar has
developed initial set. Scarify the surface of the first lift to ensure
integral bond between successive layers.
Finishing:
Level surface of repair mortar using a float or screed.
Apply final finish when mortar has begun to stiffen using a wooden,
plastic, or synthetic sponge float or trowel.
Spray apply undiluted "Confilm" evaporation retarder lightly to aid in
finishing, especially in windy, hot conditions.
Curing:
Protect fresh mortar from premature evaporation. Cure finished repair
mortar by one of the following methods:
03721 - 3
Preferred Method: Keep area continuously moist with water as soon as
mortar surface has hardened (thumb print hard), for a minimum of seven
days.
END OF SECTION 03721
This section prepared by Roberts and Thomal—Inc.
03721 -'4
r
r SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Requirements of this section apply to masonry work specified in
Division-4 section "Reinforced Unit Masonry"
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of masonry work is indicated on drawings and
schedule.
Types of masonry work required include:
Concrete unit masonry for new construction.
Concrete unit masonry repairs to existingstructure.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each type
of masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured products,
including certifications that each type compliers with specified
requirements.
DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition.
Store and handle masonry units to prevent their deterioration or
damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants,
corrosion or other causes.
Limit moisture absorption of concrete masonry units during
delivery and until time of installation to the maximum
percentage specified for Type I units for the average annual
relative humidity as reported by the U.S. Weather Bureau
Station nearest project site.
Store cementitious materials off the ground, under cover and in
dry location.
Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics
can be maintained.
Store masonry accessories including metal items to prevent
92148 04200 - 1
deterioration by corrosion and accumulation of 'dirt'.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Protection of Work: During erection, cover top of walls with
heavy waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover
partially completed structures when work is not in progress.
Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold
cover securely in place.
Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hours
after building masonry walls or columns.
Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after
building masonry walls or columns.
Staining: Prevent grout or mortar or soil from staining the face
of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Remove immediately
grout or mortar in contact with such masonry.
Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and mortar splatter
by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface.
Protect sills, ledges and projections from droppings of mortar.
Cold Weather Protection:
Do not'lay masonry units which are wet or frozen.
Remove any ice or snow formed on masonry bed by carefully
applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch.
Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. -
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS:
General: Comply with referenced standards and other requirements
indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit
required.
Provide special shapes where required for lintels, corners,
jambs, sash, control joints, headers, bonding and other
special conditions.
Provide square -edged units for outside corners, except
where indicated as bullnose.
Concrete Block: Provide units complying with characteristics
indicated below for Grade, Type, face size, exposed face and,
92148 04200 - 2
l
Cunder each form included, for weight classification.
Grade N.
Size: Manufacturer's standard units with nominal face
dimensions of 16" long x 8" high (15-5/8" x 7-5/8" actual) x
r• thicknesses indicated.
T,vpeII, moisture -controlled units.
Exposed Facgs: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,
unless otherwise indicated.
Hollow Loadbearing Block: ASTM C 90 and as follows:
Weight Classification: Lightweight.
Solid Loadbearing Block: ASTM C 145 and as follows:
Weight Classification: Lightweight.
Concrete Building Brick: Provide units complying with ASTM C 55
and characteristics indicated below for grade, type, size and
weight classification.
Grade: Same as indicated for concrete block.
Type: Same as indicated for concrete block.
Size: As indicated.
Weight Classification: Medium weight.
MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS:
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, except Type III may be used
for cold weather construction. Provide natural color or white
cement as required to produce required mortar color.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.
Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.
Aggregates for Mortar: ASTM C 144, except for joints less than
1/4" use aggregate graded with 100% passing the No. 16 sieve.
Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.
Water: Clean,and potable.
JOINT REINFORCEMENT, TIES AND ANCHORING DEVICES:
92148
04200 - 3
Materials: Comply with requirements indicated below for basic
materials and with requirements indicated under each form of
joint reinforcement, tie and anchor for size and other
characteristics:
Hot -Dip Galvanized Steel Wire: ASTM A 82 for
uncoated wire and with ASTM A 123, Class B-2 (1.5 oz. per
sq. ft. of wire surface) for zinc coating applied after
prefabrication into units:
Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Carbon steel with
zinc coating complying with ASTM A 525, Coating Designation
G90.
Application: Use for dovetail slots and where
indicated.
Hot -Dip Galvanized Carbon Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, Class 2
or ASTM A 635; hot dip galvanized after fabrication to
comply with ASTM A 153; Class B.
Joint Reinforcement: Provide welded -wire units prefabricated
with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into
straight lengths of not less than 101, with prefabricated corner
and tee units, and complying with requirements indicated below:
Width: Fabricate joint reinforcement in units with widths
of approximately 2" less than nominal width of walls and
partitions as required to provide mortar coverage of not
less than 5/8" on joint faces exposed to exterior and 1/2"
elsewhere.
Wire Size for Side Rods:
Wire Size for Cross Rods:
0.148311 diameter.
0.148311 diameter.
For multi-wythe masonry provide type as follows:
Truss design with diagonal cross rods spaced not more
than 16" o.c. and number of side rods as follows:
Number of Side Rods for Composite Construction:
One side rod for each face shell of concrete
masonry back-up and one rod for brick wythe.
Tab design with single pair of side rods and
rectangular box -type cross ties spaced not more
than 16" o.c.; with side rods spaced for embedment
within each face shell of back-up wythe and ties
extended to within 1" of exterior face of facing
wythe.
92148 04200 - 4
Unit Type
Masonry Inserts in Concrete: Furnish cast iron or
malleable
iron inserts
of type and
size indicated.
Dovetail Slots: Furnish dovetail
slots, with filler strips, of
slot size
indicated,
fabricated
from 0.033611 (22 gage) sheet
metal.
Anchor Bolts: Provide
steel bolts
with hex nuts and flat washers
complying
with ASTM A
307, Grade A, hot -dip galvanized to comply
_
with ASTM
C 153, Class
C, in sizes
and configurations indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES:
Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel, ASTM A 615, Grade 60 for bars
No. 3 to No. 18.
MASONRY CLEANERS:
Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate
(1/2 cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 cup dry measure)
dissolved in one gallon of water.
Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard strength general purpose
cleaner designed for new masonry surfaces of type indicated;
composed of blended organic and inorganic acids combined with
special wetting systems and inhibitors; expressly approved for
intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES:
General: Do not add admixtures including coloringpigments, air -
entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water repellant
agents, anti -freeze compounds or other admixtures, unless
otherwise indicated.
Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.
Mixing: Combine and thoroughly mix cementitious, water and
aggregate in a mechanical batch mixer; comply with referenced
ASTM standards for mixing time and water content.
Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion
Specifications, for types of mortar required, unless otherwise
indicated.
Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement -
lime.
Use Type M mortar for masonry below grade and in contact
with earth, and where indicated.
I Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476 for grout for use
92148 04200 - 5
in construction of reinforced and non -reinforced unit masonry.
Use grout of consistency indicated or if not otherwise indicated,
of consistency (fine or coarse) at time of placement which will
completely fill all spaces intended to receive grout.
Use fine grout in grout spaces less than 2" in horizontal
direction, unless otherwise indicated.
Use coarse grout in grout spaces 2" or more in least
horizontal dimension, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Do not wet concrete masonry units.
Cleaning Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, ice and
other coatings from reinforcing.
Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls, floors and other
masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-
wythe walls (if any) to the actual thickness of the masonry
units, using units of nominal thickness indicated.
Build chases and recesses as shown or required for the work of
other trades. Provide not less than 8" of masonry between chase
or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and
recesses.
Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of
masonry work. After installation of equipment, complete masonry
.work to match work immediately adjacent to the opening.
Cut masonry units using motor -driven saws to provide clean,
sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide
continuous pattern and to fit adjoining work. Use full-size
units without cutting where possible.
Use dry cutting saws to cut concrete masonry units.
CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES:
Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of
columns, walls and arises do not exceed 1/4" in 10", or 3/8" in a
story height not to exceed 2011, nor 1/2" in 40' or more. For
external corners, expansion joints, control joints and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4" in any story or 20'
maximum, not 1/2" in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head
joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4" in 101,° 1/211 maximum.
Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed
92148 04200 - 6
V�
I
I.
lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves and other
conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/41' in any bay or 20' maximum,
not 1/2" in 401 or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not
exceed 1/8" between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16"
within width of a single unit.
Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown in plain
and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not
exceed 1/2" in any bay or 201 maximum, nor,3/4" in 40' or more.
Variation in Cross -Sectional Dimensions: For columns and
thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus
1/4" not, plus 1/211.
Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/811, with a
maximum thickness limited to 1/211. Do not exceed head joint
thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/811.
AYING MASONRY WALLS:
Layout walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond
patterns with uniform joint widths and to accurately locate
opening, movement -type joints, returns and offsets. Avoid the
use of less -than -half-size units at corners, jambs and wherever
possible at other locations.
Lay-up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances,
with courses accurately spaced and coordinated with other work.
..
Pattern
Bond: Lay exposed masonry in the bond pattern shown
or,
if not
shown, lay in running bond with vertical joint in
each
course
centered on units in courses above and below.
Lay
�.,
concealed
masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or
bonded
by lapping not less than 211. Bond and interlock
each
s
course
of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less
than
nominal
4" horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.
Stopping
and Resuming Work: Rack back 1/2-unit length in
each
course;
do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry,
wet
�.
units lightly (if required) and remove loose masonry units
and
mortar
prior to laying fresh memory.
Built-in Work: As the work progresses, build -in items specified
under this and other sections of these specifications. Fill in
solidly with masonry around built-in items.
92148
Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly
with mortar, unless otherwise indicated.
Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow
masonry units, place a layer of metal lath in the joint
04200 - 7
below and rod mortar or grout into.core.
Fill cores in hollow masonry units with grout 3 _
courses (2411) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts
and similar items, unless otherwise indicated.
MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTS: "
Lay 'solid brick -size masonry units with completely filled bed and
head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head —
joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints.
Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on
horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in
starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns
and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be
reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting course
on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar
bed including areas under cells.
Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations required
to maintain bond alignment. If not shown, lay walls with 3/811
joints.
Cut joints flush for masonry walls which are to be concealed or
to be covered by other materials, unless otherwise indicated.
Tool exposed joints slightly concave using a jointer larger than
jointthickness, unless otherwise indicated.
Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in
fresh mortar. Do not pound corners or jambs to shift adjacent
stretcher units which have been set in position. If adjustments
are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh
mortar.
Collar Joints: After each course is laid, fill' in vertical
longitudinal joint between wythes solidly and with mortar for the
following masonry work:
All exterior walls, except cavity walls, and interior walls
and partitions.
Exterior walls, except cavity walls.
Nonloadbearing interior walls or partitions where metal ties
or horizontal reinforcing are indicated for structural
bonding and nominal thickness of wall or partition is
required to meet code requirements for height -to -thickness
ratio.
92148 04200 - 8
STRUCTURAL BONDING OF MULTI-WYTHE MASONRY:
l
Use continuous horizontal ioint reinforcement installed in
horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes. Install at
not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course
at corners, unless otherwise shown.
For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at
corners with prefabricated "L" units, in addition to masonry
bonding.
Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or
control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type
of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and
space as follows: .
Provide individual metal ties at not more than 24" o.c.
vertically.
Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcement using
prefabricated "T" units.
Intersecting Load -bearing Walls: If carried up separately, block
or tooth vertical joint with 8" maximum offsets and provide rigid
steel anchors spaced not more than 4'-0" o.c. vertically, or omit
blocking and provide rigid steel anchors at not more than 2'-0"
o.c. vertically. Form anchors of galvanized steel not less than
1-1/2" x 1/4" x 2' -0" long with ends turned up not less than 2"
or with cross -pins. If used with hollow masonry units, embed
ends in mortar -filled cores.
CAVITY WALLS•
Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings and other materials during
construction. Strike joints facing cavity flush.
Tie exterior wythe to back-up with continuous horizontal joints
reinforcing, installed in mortar joints at not more than 16"
o.c. vertically.
Provide weep holes in exterior wythe of cavity wall located
immediately above ledges and flashing, spaced 2'-0" o.c., unless
otherwise indicated.
Cover cavity side of weep holes with copper or plastic
insect screening before loose -fill masonry insulation is
placed in cavity.
92148 04200 - 9
74,
HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT:
General: Provide continuous horizontaljoint reinforcement as
indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their
entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior side of
walls, 1/2" elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 611.
Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion
joints, unless otherwise indicated.
Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint "reinforcing
unless specifically noted to be omitted.
Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of
prefabricated "L" and "T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement
units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special
conditions.
Space continuous horizontal' reinforcement' as follows:
For multi-wythe walls (solid or cavity) where continuous
horizontal reinforcement acts as 'structural bond or tie
between wythes, space reinforcement as required by code but
not more than 16" o.c. vertically.
For single-wythe walls, space reinforcement at 16" o.c.
vertically, unless otherwise indicated.
For parapets,. space reinforcement at 8" o.c. vertically,
unless otherwise indicated.
Reinforce masonry openings greater than 1'-0" wide, with
horizontal joint reinforcement placed in 2 horizontal joints
approximately 8" apart, immediately above the lintel and
immediately below the sill. Extend reinforcement a minimum of
2'-0" beyond jambs of the opening except at control joints.
In addition to wall reinforcement, provide additional
reinforcement at openings as required to comply with the
above.
LINTELS•
Install steel lintels where indicated.
Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more
than 1'-0" for brick size units and 2'-0" for block size units
are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels.
Provide precast or formed -in -place masonry lintels. Cure precast
lintels before handling and installation. Temporarily support
formed -in -place lintels.
92148 04200 - 10
C"
i.
t
For hollow concrete masonry unit walls, use specially formed
U-shaped lintel units with reinforcement bars placed as
r..
shown filled with coarse grout.
Provide minimum bearing of all at each jamb, unless otherwise
indicated.
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY:
Refer to Division-4 sections "Reinforced Unit Masonry" for
installation requirements applicable to reinforced unit masonry.
PARGING•
Parge walls where indicated with Type S or N mortar, in thickness
indicated.
I Thickness: Not less than 1/211.
Trowel finish to a smooth, dense surface. Form a wash at top of
parging and a cove at bottom. Where parging is applied in 2
coats, roughen first coat when partially set, let harden for 24
hours and moisten prior to application of second coat.
Damp cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect until cured.
REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING:
Remove and replace masonry units which are loose, chipped,
broken, stained or otherwise damaged, or if units do not match
adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match
adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to
eliminate evidence of replacement.
Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or
holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar.
Point -up all joints including corners, openings and adjacent work
to provide a neat, uniform appearance, prepared for application
of sealants.
Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean
masonry as follows:
Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles
and non-metallic scrape hoes or chisels.
Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave 1/2 panel
n uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's
14
approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning
of masonry.
Protect adjacent non -masonry surfaces from contact with
92148 04200 - 11
cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking
agent, polyethylene film or waterproof masking tape.
Saturate wall surfaces with water prior to application of
cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly
with clear water.
Use bucket and brush hand cleaning method described in BIA
"Technical Note No. 20 Revised" to clean brick masonry made
from clay or shale, except use masonry cleaner indicated
below.
Acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of _
cleaner manufacturer.
Clean concrete unit masonry to comply with masonry
manufacturer's directions and applicable NCMA "Tek"
bulletins.
Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions in
a manner acceptable to Installer, which ensures unit masonry work
being without damage and deterioration at time of substantial
completion. _
END OF SECTION 04200
r
92148 04200 12
r"
SECTION 04230 - REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Extent of each type of reinforced unit masonry work is indicated on
Drawings and in schedules. Requirements of Section 04200, Unit
Masonry, apply to work of this section.
SUBMITTALS:
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication, bending, and
t• placement of reinforcing bars. Comply with the ACI 315 "Manual of
k; Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures".
Show bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral
�► ties and other arrangements and assemblies as required for
fabrication and placement of reinforcement for unit masonry work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
MATERIALS:
General: Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for masonry
materials and accessories not included in this section.
Reinforcing Bars: Provide deformed bars of following grades
complying with ASTM A 615 and as follows:
Provide Grade 60.
Shop -fabricate reinforcing bars which are shown to be bent or
hooked.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PLACING REINFORCING:
General: Clean reinforcement of loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice
or other materials which will reduce bond to mortar or grout. Do
not use reinforcement bars with kinks or bends not shown on the
Drawings or final shop drawings, or bars with reduced cross-section
due to excessive rusting or other causes.
04230 - 1
Position reinforcement accurately at the spacing shown. Support
and secure vertical bars against displacement. Horizontal
reinforcement may be placed as the masonry work progresses. Where
vertical bars are shown in close proximity, provide a clear
distance between bars of not less than the nominal bar diameter or
1" (whichever is greater).
Splice reinforcement bars where shown; do not splice at other
points unless acceptable to the Engineer.- Provide lapped splices, _
unless otherwise shown. In splicing vertical bars or attaching to
dowels, lap ends, place in contact and wire tie.
Provide not less than minimum lap shown, or if not shown, as
required by governing code.
Embed prefabricated horizontal joint reinforcing as the work
progresses, with a minimum cover of 5/8" on exterior face of walls
and 1/2" at other locations. Lap units not less than 6" at ends.
Use prefabricated "L" and "T units to provide continuity at
corners and intersections. Cut and bend units as recommended by
manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, column
fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions.
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Refer to Section 04200, Unit Masonry, for general installation
requirements of unit masonry.
Temporary Formwork: Provide formwork and shores as required for
temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect,
support, brace and maintain formwork.
Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. =—
Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout, or
concrete (if any). Brace, tie and support as required to maintain
position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced
masonry.
Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry member has
hardened sufficiently to carry its own weight and all other
reasonable temporary loads that may be placed on it during
construction.
INSTALLATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY:
General•
Do not wet concrete masonry units (CMU).
Lay CMU units with full -face shell mortar beds. Fill vertical head --
joints (end joints between units) solidly with mortar from face of
unit to a distance behind face equal to not less than the thickness
04230 -'2
r
of longitudinal face shells. Solidly bed cross -webs of starting
courses in mortar. Maintain head and bed joint widths shown, or if
not shown, provide 3/8" joints.
Where solid CMU units are shown, lay with full mortar head and bed
joints.
` Walls:
Pattern Bond: Lay CMU wall units -in 1/2 running bond with vertical
joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below,
unless otherwise indicated. Bond and interlock each' course at
corners and intersections. Use special -shaped units where shown,
and as required for corners, jambs, sash, control joints, lintels,
bond beams and other special conditions.
Maintain vertical continuity of core or cell cavities, which are to
be reinforced and grouted, to provide minimum clear dimensions
indicated and to provide minimum clearance and grout coverage for
vertical reinforcing bars. Keep cavities free of mortar. Solidly
bed webs in mortar where adjacent to reinforced cores or cells.
Where horizontal reinforced beams (bond beams) are shown, use
special units or modify- units to allow for placement of continuous
horizontal reinforcing bars. Place small mesh expanded metal lath
or wire screening in mortar joints under bond beam courses over
cores or cells of non -reinforced vertical cells, or provide units
with solid bottoms.
Grouting
Use "Fine Grout" for filling spaces less than 4" in both horizontal
directions.
Use "Coarse Grout for filling 4" spaces or larger in both
horizontal directions.
Grouting Technique: Use low -lift grouting techniques subject to
the requirements which follow.
Low -Lift Grout inct :
Provide minimum clear dimension of 2" and clear area of 8 sq. in.
in vertical cores to be grouted.
Place vertical reinforcement prior to laying of CMU. Extend above
t elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing.
Support in position at vertical intervals not exceeding 192 bar
diameters nor 10 feet.
04230 - 3
Lay CMU to maximum pour height. - Do not exceed 5 feet height, or if
bond beam occurs below 5 feet height, stop pour at course below
bond beam.
Pour grout using container with spout or by chute. Rod or vibrate
grout during placing. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt
pouring of grout for more than one hour. Terminate grout pours 1
1/2" below top course of pour.
Bond Beams: Stop grout in vertical cells 1 1/2" below bond beam
course. Place horizontal reinforcing in bond beams; lap at corners
and intersections as shown. Place grout in bond beam course before
filling vertical cores above bond beam.
Grout Placing•
Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has
attained sufficient strength to resist displacement of masonry
units and breaking of mortar bond. Install shores and bracing, if
required, before starting grouting operations.
Place grout by pumping into grout spaces unless alternate methods
are acceptable to the Engineer. ._
Limit grout pours to sections which can be completed in one working
day with not more than one hour interruption of pouring operation.
Place grout in lifts which do not exceed 5 feet. Allow not less
than 30 minutes, nor more than one hour between lifts of a given
pour. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during pouring operation.
Where bond beam occurs more than one course below top of pour, fill
bond beam course to within 1" of vertically reinforced cavities,
during construction of masonry.
When more than one pour is required to complete a given section of
masonry, extend reinforcement beyond masonry as required for
splicing. Pour grout to within 1 1/2" of top course of first pour.
After grouted masonry is cured, lay masonry units and place
reinforcement for second pour section before grouting. Repeat
sequence if more pours are required.
END OF SECTION 04230
This section prepared by Roberts and Thoma, Inc.
04230 - 4
I
r
SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS
y, PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
r The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
Definition: Metal fabrications include items made from iron
and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and
castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal
systems specified elsewhere.
t
Extent of metal fabrications is indicated on drawings and as
specified herein.
Types of work in this section include metal fabrications for:
Rough hardware.
Loose bearing and leveling plates.
Loose steel lintels.
Miscellaneous framing and supports.
Miscellaneous steel trim.
Steel ladders.
Grab bars are specified in Section 10800.
Swimming pool equipment is specified in Section 13152.
QUALITY ASSURANCE:
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent
possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
SUBMITTALS:
Product Data: Submit manufacturers specifications, anchor
details and installation instructions for products used in
miscellaneous metal fabrications, including paint products and
1 grout.
j~ Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection
of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Include plans,
elevations and details of sections and connections. Show
anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchor and
r bolt installation by others.
92148 05500 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS•
MATERIALS•
Ferrous Metals•
Metal Surfaces, General: For fabrication of miscellaneous metal
work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are
smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.
Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A 36.
Steel Tubing: Cold formed, ASTM A 500; or hot rolled, ASTM A
501.
Structural Steel Sheet: Hot -rolled, ASTM A 570; or
cold -rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1; of grade required for design
loading.
Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446, of grade
required for design loading. Coating designation as indicated,
or if not indicated, G90.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53; Type and grade (if applicable) as
selected by fabricator and as required for design loading; black
finish unless galvanizing is indicated; standard weight (schedule
40), unless otherwise indicated.
Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 30.
Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A 47, grade as selected by
fabricator.
Brackets, Flanges and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of the same
type material and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise
indicated.
Concrete Inserts: Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous
castings, either malleable iron, ASTM A 47, or cast steel, ASTM A
27. Provide bolts, washers and shims as required, hot -dip
galvanized, ASTM A 153.
Grout•
Non -Shrink Non -Metallic Grout: Pre -mixed, factory -packaged,
non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with CE
CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer
for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this
section.
92148 05500 - 2
i
Fasteners•
1.
General: Provide zinc -coated fasteners for exterior use or where
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade
and class required.
Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A.
Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.
Machine Screws: Cadmium plated steel, FS FF-S-92.
Wood Screws: Flat head carbon steel, FS FF-S-111.
Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92.
Masonry Anchorage Devices: Expansion shields, FS FF-S-325.
Toggle Bolts: Tumble -wing type, FS FF-B-588, type, class and
style as required.
Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84.
Paint:
Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or Fabricator's
standard, fast -curing, lead-free, "universal" primer;
selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for
compatibility with finish paint systems indicated and for
compatibility to provide a sound foundation for field -applied
topcoats despite prolonged exposure; complying with performance
requirements of FS TT-P-645.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for
regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, complying with the
Military Specifications MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20.
Concrete Fill:
Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements of
Division-3 section "Concrete Work" for normal weight, ready -mix
concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500
psi, 440 lbs. cement per cu. ft. minimum and W/C ratio of
0.65 maximum, unless higher strengths indicated.
FABRICATION, GENERAL:
Workmanship: Use materials of size and thickness indicated or,
if not indicated, as required to produce strength and durability
in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions
indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of
fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or
92148 05500 - 3
specified for various components of work.
Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and
surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to
a radius of approximately 1/32" unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent -metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing
grain separation or otherwise impairing work.
Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS
recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds
smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.
Foria exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, _
using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed
fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat-
head (countersunk) screws or bolts.
Provide for anchorage of type indicated, coordinated with
supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to
provide adequate support for intended use.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as
indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items.
Galvanizing: Provide a zinc coating for those items indicated or
specified to be galvanized, as follows:
ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.
ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel
shapes, plates, bars and strip_1/8" thick and heavier.
ASTM A 386 for galvanizing assembled steel products.
Fabricate joints which will be exposed to weather in a manner to
exclude water or provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
Shop Painting:
Apply shop primer to surfaces of metal fabrications except those
which are galvanized or as indicated to be embedded in concrete
or masonry, unless otherwise indicated, and in compliance with
requirements of SSPC-PA1 "paint Application Specification No. 1"
for shop painting.
Surface Preparation: Prepare ferrous metal surfaces to
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions
of installed metal fabrications:
Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B): SSPC-SP6 "Commercial Blast
Cleaning".
92148 05500 - 4
a
r' Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".
ROUGH HARDWARE:
Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates,
anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron
shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for
anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.
Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware items are specified
in Division-6 sections.
IL Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required.
Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear oil
0" wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish Steel washers.
LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES:
E Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing
on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps
or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill
plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required.
Galvanize after fabrication.
LOOSE STEEL LINTELS:
Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and
... recesses in masonry walls and partitions as shown. Weld
adjoining members together to form a single unit where
indicated. Provide not less than 8" bearing at each side of
openings, unless otherwise indicated.
Galvanize loose steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls.
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS:
Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a
part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.
Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles
indicated or, if not indicated, of required dimensions to receive
adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except
as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel
shapes, plates and steel bars, of welded construction using
mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap
units to receive hardware and similar items.
Eauip units with integrally welded anchors for casting into
concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units must
be installed after concrete is placed.
92148
Except as otherwise indicated, space anchors 24" o.c. and
provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4" x 1/4" x 8" steel
05500 - 5
straps.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports.
Galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports where indicated.
MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM:
Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Unless
otherwise indicated, fabricate units from structural steel
shapes, plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints
and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever
possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as
required for coordination of assembly and installation with other
work.
Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.
STEEL LADDERS•
Fabricate steel ladders to design, dimensions, and details
indicated. Provide rungs and stringer members formed of pipe
of sizes and wall thickness indicated, but not less than that
required to support 350 pound loading.
Fabricate ladder with 1" diameter smooth steel rungs welded
to 2 1/2" x 3/8" flat bar stringers. Clip to wall and floor
as detailed.
Galvanize steel ladder components.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
PREPARATION•
Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation
of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible. Do not delay
job progress; allow for trimming and fitting where taking field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams,
templates, instructions, and directions for installation of
anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors, which are to be
embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate
delivery of such items to project site.
NSTALLATION•
General•
Fastening to -In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices
92148 05500 - 6
rand
fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal
fabrications to
in -place construction; including threaded
fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts,
through -bolts, lag
bolts, wood screws and other connectors as
required.
Cutting, Fitting and
Placement: Perform cutting, drilling and
fitting required
for installation of miscellaneous metal
fabrications. Set
work accurately in location, alignment and
elevation, plumb,
level, true and free of rack, measured from
j"
established lines
and levels. Provide temporary bracing
or anchors in formwork for items which are to be built into
concrete masonry or
similar construction.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight
hairline joints. Weld connections which are not to be left as
exposed joints, but cannot be shop welded because of shipping
size limitations. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop
paint coat. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior
units which have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication,
and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual
shielded metal -arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made,
and methods used in correcting welding work.
Setting Loose Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing
surfaces of any bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve
bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other
adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been
positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge
of the bearing plate before packing with grout. Use metallic
non -shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to
moisture; use non-metallic non -shrink grout in exposed locations,
unless otherwise indicated.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure
that no voids remain.
Steel Ladders•
Secure ladders to wall and floor with steel bracket clips as
indicated. Provide brackets with not less than 6 1/2" clearance
from inside face of rung to finished wall surface. Locate
brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required
for design loading. Secure brackets to building construction as
follows:
92148 05500 - 7
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled -in
expansion shield and either concealed hanger bolt or
exposed lag bolt, as applicable.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square
heads.
For stud partitions use lag bolts set into wood backing
between studs. Coordinate with stud installations for
accurate location of backing members. -
ADJUST AND CLEAN:
Touch -Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field
welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and
paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting.
Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness
of 2.0 mils.
For galvanized surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections
and abraded areas and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply
with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 05500
92148 05500 - 8
r
77
SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY•
Types of work in this section include rough carpentry for:
Wood grounds, nailers, and blocking.
Miscellaneous framing and items for site work, temporary
closures, guards, runways and ladders.
DEFINITIONS:
Rough carpentry includes carpentry work not specified as part of
other sections and which is generally not exposed, except as
otherwise indicated.
PRODUCT HANDLING:
Delivery and Storage: Keep materials dry at all. times. Protect
A against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels;
�^ provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Coordination: Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope
as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,
nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow
attachment of other.work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
LUMBER, GENERAL•
Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20
"American Softwood Lumber Standard" and with applicable grading
rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
Standards Committee's (ALSO) Board of Review.
Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies and the abbreviations
used to reference with lumber grades and species include the
following:
92148 06100 - 1
r
RIS — Redwood Inspection Service.'
NLGA - National Lumber Grades Authority (Canadian).
SPIB - Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.
WCLIB - West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.
Grade Stamps: Factory -mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp
of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule
requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,
moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail
dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20, for
moisture content specified for each use.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide seasoned lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture
content at time of dressing shipment for sizes 2" or less in
nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated.
DIMENSION LUMBER:
For light framing provide "Stud" or "Standard" grade lumber for
stud framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to 6" wide, 10' and shorter) and
"Standard" grade for other light framing (2" to 4" thick, 2" to
4" wide), any species.
For structural light framing (211 to 4" thick, 2" to 4" wide),
provide the following grade and species:
No. 2 grade.
Douglas Fir or Douglas -Fir -Larch graded, respectively, under
VCLIB or WWPA rules.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER:
Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including
rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, _
nailers, blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar
members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated, worked into shapes
shown, and as follows:
Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not
specified receive wood preservative treatment.
Grade: Standard Grade light framing size lumber of any species
or board size lumber as required. No. 3 Common or Standard grade
boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or No. 3 boards per SPIB rules.
92148 06100 - 2
r
CONSTRUCTION PANELS:
Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product
Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood" for plywood
panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions,
with American Plywood Associates (APA) "Performance Standard and
Policies for Structural -Use Panels", Form No. E445.
Trademark: Factory -mark each construction panel with APA
trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements.
Concealed APA Performance -Rated Panels: Where construction
panels will be used for the following concealed types of
applications, provide APA Performance -Rated Panels complying with
requirements indicated for grade designation, span rating,
exposure durability classification, edge detail (where
applicable) and thickness.
Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone
equipment, provide fire -retardant treated plywood panels with
grade designation, APA C-D PLUGGED INT with exterior glue, in
thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less
than 3/4".
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:
Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide size, type, material and finish
ram' as indicated and as recommended by applicable standards,
complying with applicable Federal Specifications for nails,
staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers and anchoring devices.
741�
Provide metal hangers and framing anchors of the size and type
recommended by the manufacturer for each use including
recommended nails.
Where rough carpentry work is exposed to weather, in ground
contact, or in area of high relative humidity,
provide fasteners and anchorages with a hot -dip zinc coating
(ASTM A 153).
Buildinc,L Paper: ASTM D 226, Type I; asphalt saturated felt, non -
perforated, 15-lb. type.
WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS:
Preservative Treatment: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as
"Trt-Wd" or "Treated," or is specified herein to be treated,
comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2 (Lumber)
POW and C9 (Plywood) and of AWPB Standards listed below. Mark each
treated item with the AWPB Quality Mark Requirements.
Pressure -treat above -ground items with water -borne preservatives
to comply with AWPB LP-2. After treatment, kiln -dry lumber and
92148 06100 - 3
r..
plywood to a maximum moisture content, respectively of 19 percent
and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following:
Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking,
stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,
flashing, vapor barriers and waterproofing.
Wood sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping and similar
concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.
Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment, where
possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces with heavy
brush coat of same chemical used for treatment and to comply with _
AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and
discard damaged or defective pieces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
INSTALLATION, GENERAL:
Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality
of work, and units which are too small to use in fabricating work
with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
Set carpentry work to required levels and lines, with members
plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.
Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and
fastening as shown and as required by recognized standards.
Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use
finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that
will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections
between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;
predrill as required.
WOOD GROUNDS NAILERS BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS:
Provide wherever shown and where required for screeding or
attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as
required for true line and level of work to be attached.
Coordinate location with other work involved.
Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading.
Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete
placement.
92148 06100 - 4
Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative treated, key -
bevelled lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of thickness
required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish
r" material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer
1 required.
... END OF SECTION 06100
92148
06100 - 5
SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
RELATED DOCUMENTS:
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including
General Conditions, Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
SUMMARY•
Extent of caulking and sealants is indicated on the drawings and
shall include the following:
Joint fillers and sealants required for new expansion joints
in.new concrete pool deck and adjacent concrete slabs. —
The replacement of all existing joint fillers and sealants
in existing expansion joints located within the existing —
swimming pool bowl (gutter, walls and floor).
Exterior joint treatment at all door frames, window frames, _
masonry control joints and other exterior applications as
required to produce a wind and moisture proof structure.
Interior joint treatment at items and fixtures where
necessary to fill cracks and joints.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCES:
Provide joints sealers that have been produced and installed to
establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.
SUBMITTALS•
Product Data from manufacturers for each joint sealer product
required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint
sealer application.
Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Manufacturer's standard
bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full
range of colors available, for each product exposed to view.
Samples for verification purposes of each type and color of joint
sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2 inch wide
joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching
the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers
92148 07900 - 1
r
or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name
and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,
curing time and mixing instructions for multi -component
materials.
Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers'
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other
causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS:
Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of
joint sealers under the following conditions:
When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are
outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers.
Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of
joint sealers where joint widths are less than allowed by joint
sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ATERIALS. GENERAL:
Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other
related materials that are compatible with one another and with
joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealer indicated or, if
not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
SWIMMING POOL DECK, BOWL AND PAVEMENTSEALANTS:
General: Provide sealant which is approved for use with high
traffic concrete surfaces and continuous water immersion.
One -Part Urethane, Self -leveling Sealant: Equal to Sonneborn,
Sonolastic SL 1, complying with the FS TT-S-00230C, Type I Class
A; ASTM C-920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M.
ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS:
Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated
which complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those
r referenced for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. Colors shall be as
selected by Architect.
92148 07900 - 2
L'